Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7

Product statements..............................................................................................................................................7

Learning about the printer......................................................................... 10

Finding information about the printer...........................................................................................................10

Finding the printer serial number....................................................................................................................11

Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................ 12

Printer conﬁgurations........................................................................................................................................ 13

Attaching cables.................................................................................................................................................16

Using the control panel.....................................................................................................................................17

Understanding the status of the power button and indicator light....................................................... 17

Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................19

Using the home screen.....................................................................................................................................19

Customizing the home screen.......................................................................................................................20

Supported applications................................................................................................................................... 20

Setting up Card Copy.......................................................................................................................................20

Creating a shortcut............................................................................................................................................ 21

Using Display Customization.......................................................................................................................... 21

Setting up Scan Center....................................................................................................................................22

Setting up Device Quotas...............................................................................................................................22

Using QR Code Generator..............................................................................................................................23

Conﬁguring Eco‑Settings................................................................................................................................ 23

Using Customer Support.................................................................................................................................23

Creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle............................................................................................................. 23

Managing bookmarks.......................................................................................................................................24

Managing contacts............................................................................................................................................25

Setting up and using the accessibility features......................................27

Enabling Magniﬁcation mode.........................................................................................................................27

Activating Voice Guidance..............................................................................................................................27

Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate................................................................................................27

Navigating the screen using gestures......................................................................................................... 27

Using the keyboard on the display...............................................................................................................28

Contents 2

Enabling spoken passwords or personal identiﬁcation numbers........................................................ 28

Loading paper and specialty media......................................................... 29

Setting the size and type of the specialty media......................................................................................29

Conﬁguring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 29

Loading the 550‑sheet tray............................................................................................................................29

Loading the 2100‑sheet tray.......................................................................................................................... 32

Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................37

Linking trays........................................................................................................................................................38

Paper support..............................................................................................39

Supported paper sizes.....................................................................................................................................39

Supported paper types....................................................................................................................................42

Supported paper weights................................................................................................................................43

Printing.........................................................................................................46

Printing from a computer.................................................................................................................................46

Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................ 46

Printing from a ﬂash drive................................................................................................................................47

Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types.......................................................................................................... 48

Conﬁguring conﬁdential jobs......................................................................................................................... 49

Printing conﬁdential and other held jobs....................................................................................................49

Printing from a Cloud Connector proﬁle..................................................................................................... 50

Printing a font sample list.................................................................................................................................51

Printing a directory list...................................................................................................................................... 51

Canceling a print job......................................................................................................................................... 51

Copying........................................................................................................52

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 52

Making copies....................................................................................................................................................52

Copying photos................................................................................................................................................. 52

Copying on letterhead..................................................................................................................................... 53

Copying on both sides of the paper.............................................................................................................53

Reducing or enlarging copies........................................................................................................................ 53

Collating copies................................................................................................................................................. 53

Placing separator sheets between copies................................................................................................. 53

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet............................................................................................. 54

Contents 3

Creating a copy shortcut................................................................................................................................. 54

E-mailing...................................................................................................... 55

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 55

Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings.........................................................................................................55

Sending an e-mail..............................................................................................................................................63

Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 63

Faxing...........................................................................................................64

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 64

Setting up the printer to fax............................................................................................................................64

Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................72

Scheduling a fax.................................................................................................................................................73

Creating a fax destination shortcut...............................................................................................................73

Changing the fax resolution............................................................................................................................73

Adjusting the fax darkness..............................................................................................................................74

Printing a fax log................................................................................................................................................ 74

Blocking junk faxes........................................................................................................................................... 74

Holding faxes...................................................................................................................................................... 74

Forwarding a fax................................................................................................................................................ 74

Scanning...................................................................................................... 76

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.....................................................................76

Scanning to a computer...................................................................................................................................76

Scanning to an FTP server.............................................................................................................................. 77

Scanning to a network folder......................................................................................................................... 78

Creating an FTP shortcut.................................................................................................................................78

Scanning to a ﬂash drive................................................................................................................................. 78

Scanning to a Cloud Connector proﬁle....................................................................................................... 79

Understanding the printer menus............................................................80

Menu map........................................................................................................................................................... 80

Device....................................................................................................................................................................81

Print.......................................................................................................................................................................95

Paper................................................................................................................................................................... 104

Copy.................................................................................................................................................................... 107

Fax..........................................................................................................................................................................111

Contents 4

E-mail...................................................................................................................................................................124

FTP.......................................................................................................................................................................130

USB Drive...........................................................................................................................................................135

Network/Ports.................................................................................................................................................... 141

Security...............................................................................................................................................................153

Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 160

Help...................................................................................................................................................................... 161

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................... 162

Printing the Menu Settings Page................................................................................................................. 162

Securing the printer..................................................................................163

Locating the security slot...............................................................................................................................163

Erasing printer memory..................................................................................................................................163

Erasing printer hard disk memory............................................................................................................... 163

Encrypting the printer hard disk...................................................................................................................164

Restoring factory default settings................................................................................................................164

Statement of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................164

Maintaining the printer............................................................................ 166

Conﬁguring supply notiﬁcations.................................................................................................................. 166

Setting up e‑mail alerts.................................................................................................................................. 166

Viewing reports................................................................................................................................................166

Adjusting the speaker volume......................................................................................................................167

Networking........................................................................................................................................................ 167

Setting up serial printing (Windows only)................................................................................................... 171

Cleaning printer parts...................................................................................................................................... 171

Ordering parts and supplies......................................................................................................................... 186

Replacing parts and supplies....................................................................................................................... 190

Moving the printer........................................................................................................................................... 215

Saving energy and paper.............................................................................................................................. 216

Recycling............................................................................................................................................................ 217

Clearing jams.............................................................................................218

Avoiding jams................................................................................................................................................... 218

Identifying jam locations................................................................................................................................ 219

Paper jam in trays........................................................................................................................................... 220

Paper jam in door A.........................................................................................................................................221

Contents 5

Paper jam in door C........................................................................................................................................223

Paper jam in the standard bin......................................................................................................................224

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................225

Paper jam in the automatic document feeder.........................................................................................226

Paper jam in the 4‑bin mailbox....................................................................................................................228

Paper jam in the oset stacker or staple ﬁnisher...................................................................................229

Paper jam in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher............................................................................................ 231

Staple jam in the staple ﬁnisher..................................................................................................................232

Staple jam in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher...........................................................................................235

Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 238

Print quality problems....................................................................................................................................238

Printing problems............................................................................................................................................239

The printer is not responding......................................................................................................................269

Unable to read ﬂash drive............................................................................................................................ 270

Enabling the USB port................................................................................................................................... 270

Network connection problems....................................................................................................................270

Hardware options problems.........................................................................................................................273

Issues with supplies........................................................................................................................................274

Paper feed problems..................................................................................................................................... 275

E-mailing problems.........................................................................................................................................280

Faxing problems............................................................................................................................................. 280

Scanning problems........................................................................................................................................ 286

Contacting customer support......................................................................................................................293

Upgrading and migrating........................................................................294

Hardware.......................................................................................................................................................... 294

Software............................................................................................................................................................. 315

Firmware.............................................................................................................................................................318

Notices........................................................................................................319

Index...........................................................................................................335

Contents 6

Safety information

Conventions

Note: A note identiﬁes information that could help you.

Warning: A warning identiﬁes something that could damage the product hardware or software.

CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.

Dierent types of caution statements include:

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.

Product statements

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord to

an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,

multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily

overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of ﬁre, property damage, or poor printer

performance.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Only a Lexmark Inline Surge Protector that is properly connected

between the printer and the power cord provided with the printer may be used with this product. The

use of non-Lexmark surge protection devices may result in a risk of ﬁre, property damage, or poor

printer performance.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near

water or wet locations.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

Safety information 7

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power

cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects

such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of ﬁre or electrical shock results. Inspect

the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet

before inspecting it.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external

connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked

plug-in ports.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require

two or more people to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal

injury or printer damage:

•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.

•If the printer has separate ﬂoor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect

them before moving the printer.

•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over

thresholds and breaks in ﬂooring.

•If the printer does not have a caster base but is conﬁgured with optional trays or output options, then remove

the output options and lift the printer o the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same

time.

•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.

•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the

options.

•Keep the printer in an upright position.

•Avoid severe jarring movements.

•Make sure that your ﬁngers are not under the printer when you set it down.

•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Safety information 8

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot

component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this

label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors, trays, and covers.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those speciﬁed in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.

There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,

or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions

and local regulations.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of speciﬁc

manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer

is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release

emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for

selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

This product may produce small amounts of ozone during normal operation, and may be equipped with a ﬁlter

designed to limit ozone concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits. To avoid high

ozone concentration levels during extensive usage, install this product in a well-ventilated area and replace

the ozone and exhaust ﬁlters if instructed to do so in the product maintenance instructions. If there are no

references to ﬁlters in the product maintenance instructions, then there are no ﬁlters requiring replacement for

this product.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety information 9

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here

Initial setup instructions See the setup documentation that came with the

printer.

•Printer software

•Print or fax driver

•Printer ﬁrmware

•Utility

Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for

your printer model, and then in the Type menu,

select the driver, ﬁrmware, or utility that you need.

•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media

•Loading paper

•Conﬁguring printer settings

•Viewing and printing documents and photos

•Conﬁguring the printer on a network

•Caring for and maintaining the printer

•Troubleshooting and solving problems

Information Center—Go to

https://infoserve.lexmark.com.

How‑to videos—Go to

https://infoserve.lexmark.com/idv/.

Help Menu Pages—Access the guides on the

printer ﬁrmware, or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Touch Screen Guide—Go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Setting up and conﬁguring the accessibility features of your

printer

Lexmark Accessibility Guide—Go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Help information for using the printer software Help for Microsoft Windows or Macintosh operating

systems—Open a printer software program or

application, and then click Help.

Click

to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:

•Help is automatically installed with the printer

software.

•Depending on the operating system, the

printer software is either in the printer

program folder or on the desktop.

Learning about the printer 10

What are you looking for? Find it here

•Documentation

•Live chat support

•E‑mail support

•Voice support

Go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Note: Select your country or region, and then

select your product to view the appropriate

support site.

Support contact information for your country or

region can be found on the website or on the

printed warranty that came with the printer.

Have the following information ready when you

contact customer support:

•Place and date of purchase

•Machine type and serial number

For more information, see “Finding the printer

serial number” on page 11.

•Safety information

•Regulatory information

•Warranty information

•Environmental information

Warranty information varies by country or region:

•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited

Warranty included with the printer, or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

•In other countries and regions—See the

printed warranty that came with the printer.

Product Information Guide—See the

documentation that came with the printer or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Finding the printer serial number

1Open door A.

Learning about the printer 11

2Locate the serial number at the left side of the printer.

Selecting a location for the printer

•Leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors and to install hardware options.

•Set up the printer near an electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product

near water or wet locations.

•Make sure that airﬂow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical

Committee 156 standard.

•Provide a ﬂat, sturdy, and stable surface.

•Keep the printer:

–Clean, dry, and free of dust

–Away from stray staples and paper clips

–Away from the direct airﬂow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators

–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes

•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid ﬂuctuations.

Ambient temperature 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F)

Storage temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)

•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

Learning about the printer 12

1Top 15 2 mm (6 i n.)

2Rear 152 mm (6 in.)

3Right side 152 mm (6 in.)

4Front 406 mm (16 in.)

Note: The minimum space needed in front of the printer is 75 mm (3 in.)

5Left side 152 mm (6 in.)

Printer conﬁgurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

You can conﬁgure your printer by adding optional 550‑ or 2100‑sheet trays. For more information, see “Installing

the 550‑sheet tray” on page 306 or “Installing the 2100‑sheet tray” on page 307.

Learning about the printer 13

Basic model

1Automatic document feeder (ADF) tray

2ADF bin

3Standard bin

4Multipurpose feeder

5Standard 550‑sheet tray

6Control panel

7ADF

Learning about the printer 14

Conﬁgured model

Hardware option Alternative hardware option

14‑bin mailbox •Oset stacker

•Staple ﬁnisher

•Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

22100‑sheet tray 550‑sheet trays

3Caster base Caster base

4550‑sheet trays 2100‑sheet tray

5Staple ﬁnisher •4‑bin mailbox

•Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

•Oset stacker

When using optional trays:

•Always use a caster base when the printer is conﬁgured with a 2100‑sheet tray.

•The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a conﬁguration.

•If the 2100‑sheet tray is installed, then you cannot use an optional 550‑sheet tray.

•A maximum of two optional trays may be conﬁgured with the printer.

•The printer supports only one ﬁnisher at a time.

Learning about the printer 15

Attaching cables

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord to

an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any

wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.

Printer port Function

1Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

2USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.

3Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.

4USB port Attach a keyboard or any compatible option.

5EXT port

Note: Available only in some

printer models.

Connect more devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer

and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax

line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your

country or region.

6LINE port

Note: Available only in some

printer models.

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall

jack (RJ‑11), DSL ﬁlter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you

to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.

Learning about the printer 16

Using the control panel

Use the To

1Display •View the printer messages and supply status.

•Set up and operate the printer.

2Home button Go to the home screen.

3Power button •Turn on or turn o the printer.

Note: To turn o the printer, press and hold the power button for ﬁve

seconds.

•Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.

•Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

4Keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input ﬁeld.

5Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.

6Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

7Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.

8Stop or Cancel button Stop the current job.

9Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input ﬁeld.

10 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

11 Volume buttons Adjust the volume of the headset or speaker.

12 Headset or speaker port Attach a headset or speaker.

Note: This feature is available only in some printer units.

Understanding the status of the power button and

indicator light

Indicator light Printer status

O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.

Blue The printer is ready or processing data.

Learning about the printer 17

Indicator light Printer status

Red The printer requires user intervention.

Power button light Printer status

O The printer is o, ready, or processing data.

Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.

Blinking amber The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Learning about the printer 18

Setting up and using the home screen

applications

Using the home screen

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative

setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touc h To

1Copy Make copies.

2E‑mail Send e‑mails.

3Settings Access the printer menus.

4Fax Send fax.

5Address Book Manage a contact list that other applications on the printer can access.

6Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention

to continue processing.

•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home

screen.

7USB Drive •Print photos and documents from a ﬂash drive.

•Scan photos and documents to a ﬂash drive

8Job Queue Show all the current print jobs.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home

screen.

9Held Jobs Show the print jobs that are held in the printer memory.

10 Shortcut Center Organize all shortcuts.

11 App Proﬁles Access application proﬁles.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 19

Touc h To

12 Scan Proﬁles Scan and save documents directly to the computer.

13 FTP Scan and save documents directly to an FTP server.

14 Bookmarks Organize all bookmarks.

15 Change Language Change the language on the display.

Customizing the home screen

1From the control panel, touch Settings > Device > Visible Home Screen Icons.

2Select the icons that you want to appear on the home screen.

3Apply the changes.

Supported applications

Application Printer models

Scan Center MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370

Shortcut Center MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370

Card Copy MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370

Display Customization MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370

Cloud Connector MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370

Customer Support XM7355, XM7370

Device Quotas XM7355, XM7370

QR Code XM7355, XM7370

Eco‑Settings XM7355, XM7370

Setting up Card Copy

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > Card Copy > Conﬁgure.

Notes:

•Make sure that Display Icon is enabled.

•Make sure that E‑mail Settings and Network Share Settings are conﬁgured.

•When scanning a card, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 200 dpi for color and

400 dpi for black and white.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 20

•When scanning multiple cards, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 150 dpi for color

and 300 dpi for black and white.

3Apply the changes.

Note: You need a printer hard disk to scan multiple cards.

Creating a shortcut

1From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center.

Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.

2Select a printer function, and then touch Create Shortcut.

Note: The Secure E‑mail function is not supported.

3Conﬁgure the settings, and then touch Save.

4Type a unique shortcut name.

Note: To avoid clipped names on the home screen, type only up to 25 characters.

5Tou ch OK.

The application automatically generates a unique shortcut number. To launch the shortcut, press # and then

the shortcut number.

Using Display Customization

Before using the application, make sure to do the following:

•From the Embedded Web Server, click Apps > Display Customization > Conﬁgure.

•Enable and conﬁgure the screen saver, slideshow, and wallpaper settings.

Managing screen saver and slide show images

1From the Screen Saver and Slideshow Images section, add, edit, or delete an image.

Notes:

•You can add up to 10 images.

•When enabled, the status icons appear on the screen saver only when there are errors, warnings, or

cloud‑based notiﬁcations.

2Apply the changes.

Changing the wallpaper image

1From the home screen, touch Change Wallpaper.

2Select an image to use.

3Apply the changes.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 21

Running a slide show from a ﬂash drive

1Insert a ﬂash drive into the USB port.

2From the home screen, touch Slideshow.

Images appear in alphabetical order.

Note: You can remove the ﬂash drive after the slide show starts, but the images are not stored in the

printer. If the slide show stops, then insert the ﬂash drive again to view the images.

Setting up Scan Center

1From the home screen, touch Scan Center.

2Select and create a destination, and then conﬁgure the settings.

Notes:

•When creating a network destination, make sure to validate and adjust the settings until no errors

occur.

•Only destinations created from the Embedded Web Server are saved. For more information, see the

documentation that came with the solution.

3Apply the changes.

Setting up Device Quotas

Notes:

•This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 20.

•You may need administrative rights to access the application.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > Device Quotas > Conﬁgure.

3In the User Accounts section, add or edit a user, and then set the user quota.

4Apply the changes.

Note: For information on how to conﬁgure the application and its security settings, see the Device

Quotas Administrator’s Guide.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 22

Using QR Code Generator

Notes:

•This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 20.

•You may need administrative rights to access the application.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > QR Code Generator > Conﬁgure.

3Do either of the following:

•Select a default QR code value.

•Type a QR code value.

4Apply the changes.

Conﬁguring Eco‑Settings

Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 20.

1From the home screen, touch Eco‑Settings.

2Conﬁgure the Eco‑Mode settings or schedule a power-saving mode.

Using Customer Support

Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 20.

1From the home screen, touch Customer Support.

2Print or e‑mail the information.

Note: For information on conﬁguring the application settings, see the Customer Support Administrator’s

Guide.

Creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle

Note: This application is available only in certain country or region. For more information, contact your

Lexmark representative.

1From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

2Select a cloud service provider.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 23

3Tou ch Create or .

4Type a unique proﬁle name.

Note: We recommend creating a PIN to protect the proﬁle.

5Tou ch OK, and then take note of the authorization code.

Note: The authorization code is valid only for 24 hours.

6Open a web browser, and then go to https://lexmark.cloud-connect.co.

7Click Next, and then accept the Terms of Use.

8Enter the authorization code, and then click Connect.

9Log in to your cloud service provider account.

10 Grant permissions.

Note: To complete the authorization process, open the proﬁle within 72 hours.

Managing bookmarks

Creating bookmarks

Use bookmarks to print frequently accessed documents that are stored in servers or on the web.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Bookmarks > Add Bookmark, and then type a bookmark name.

3Select an Address protocol type, and then do one of the following:

•For HTTP and HTTPS, type the URL that you want to bookmark.

•For HTTPS, make sure to use the host name instead of the IP address. For example, type

myWebsite.com/sample.pdf instead of typing 123.123.123.123/sample.pdf. Make sure that

the host name also matches the Common Name (CN) value in the server certiﬁcate. For more information

on obtaining the CN value in the server certiﬁcate, see the help information for your web browser.

•For FTP, type the FTP address. For example, myServer/myDirectory. Enter the FTP port. Port 21 is

the default port for sending commands.

•For SMB, type the network folder address. For example, myServer/myShare/myFile.pdf. Type the

network domain name.

•If necessary, select the Authentication type for FTP and SMB.

To limit access to the bookmark, enter a PIN.

Note: The application supports the following ﬁle types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and HTML-based web pages.

Other ﬁle types such as DOCX and XLXS are supported in some printer models.

4Click Save.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 24

Creating folders

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Bookmarks > Add Folder, and then type a folder name.

Note: To limit access to the folder, enter a PIN.

3Click Save.

Note: You can create folders or bookmarks inside a folder. To create a bookmark, see “Creating bookmarks”

on page 24.

Managing contacts

Adding contacts

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3From the Contacts section, add a contact.

Note: You can assign the contact to one or more groups.

4If necessary, specify a login method to allow application access.

5Apply the changes.

Adding groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 25

3From the Contact Groups section, add a group name.

Note: You can assign one or more contacts to the group.

4Apply the changes.

Editing contacts or groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3Do either of the following:

•From the Contacts section, click a contact name, and then edit the information.

•From the Contact Groups section, click a group name, and then edit the information.

4Apply the changes.

Deleting contacts or groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3Do either of the following:

•From the Contacts section, select a contact that you want to delete.

•From the Contact Groups section, select a group name that you want to delete.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 26

Setting up and using the accessibility features

Enabling Magniﬁcation mode

1From the control panel, press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Select Magniﬁcation mode.

3Select OK.

For more information on navigating a magniﬁed screen, see “Navigating the screen using gestures” on

page 27.

Activating Voice Guidance

From the control panel

1Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Select OK.

From the keyboard

1Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Press Tab to navigate the focus cursor to the OK button, and then press Enter.

Notes:

•Voice Guidance is also activated when you insert headphones into the headphone jack.

•To adjust the volume, use the volume buttons at the bottom part of the control panel.

Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate

1From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speech Rate.

2Select the speech rate.

Navigating the screen using gestures

Notes:

•The gestures are applicable only when Voice Guidance is activated.

•Enable Magniﬁcation to use the zoom and pan gestures.

•Use a physical keyboard to type characters and adjust certain settings.

Gesture Function

Double‑tap Select an option or item on the screen.

Triple‑tap Zoom in or zoom out text and images.

Setting up and using the accessibility features 27

Gesture Function

Swipe right or swipe down Move to the next item on the screen.

Swipe left or swipe up Move to the previous item on the screen.

Pan Access parts of the zoomed image that are beyond the limits of the screen.

Note: This gesture requires the use of two ﬁngers to drag across a zoomed

image.

Swipe up then left Exit an application and return to the home screen.

Swipe down then left •Cancel a job.

•Go back to the previous setting.

•Exit the screen that appears without changing any setting or value.

Swipe up then down Repeat a spoken prompt.

Using the keyboard on the display

Do one or more of the following:

•Drag a ﬁnger over the key to announce the character.

•Lift the ﬁnger to enter or type the character in the ﬁeld.

•Select Backspace to delete characters.

•To hear the content in the input ﬁeld, select Tab, and then select Shift + Tab.

Enabling spoken passwords or personal identiﬁcation

numbers

1From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speak Passwords/PINs.

2Enable the setting.

Setting up and using the accessibility features 28

Loading paper and specialty media

Setting the size and type of the specialty media

The trays automatically detect the size of plain paper. For specialty media like labels, card stock, or envelopes,

do the following:

1From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type > select a paper source

2Set the size and type of the specialty media.

Conﬁguring Universal paper settings

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Media Conﬁguration > Universal Setup.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Loading the 550‑sheet tray

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1Remove the tray.

Note: To avoid paper jams, do not remove trays while the printer is busy.

2Adjust the guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

Note: Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.

Loading paper and specialty media 29

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown, and then make sure that the side guides ﬁt snugly

against the paper.

Loading paper and specialty media 30

•Do not slide paper into the tray.

•To avoid paper jams, make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper ﬁll indicator.

•Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple ﬁnisher is installed or not.

Without an optional staple ﬁnisher With an optional staple ﬁnisher

One‑sided printing One‑sided printing

Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

•When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against

the right side of the tray.

One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

Loading paper and specialty media 31

•Load envelopes with the ﬂap side up and against the left side of the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated

linings, or self‑stick adhesives.

5Insert the tray.

6From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.

Loading the 2100‑sheet tray

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1Pull out the tray.

2Adjust the guides.

Loading A5‑size paper

aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.

Loading paper and specialty media 32

bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.

cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.

dInsert the guide into its designated slot, and then press until it clicks into place.

Loading paper and specialty media 33

Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, Oﬁcio‑, and folio‑size paper

aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.

bIf the A5 length guide is still attached, then remove it. If the guide is not attached, then proceed to step

d on page 35.

cPlace the A5 length guide in its holder.

Loading paper and specialty media 34

dSqueeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

•Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple ﬁnisher is installed or not.

Without an optional staple ﬁnisher With an optional staple ﬁnisher

One‑sided printing One‑sided printing

Loading paper and specialty media 35

Without an optional staple ﬁnisher With an optional staple ﬁnisher

Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

•When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against

the right side of the tray.

One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

5Insert the tray.

Note: Press down the paper stack while inserting the tray.

6From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.

Loading paper and specialty media 36

Loading the multipurpose feeder

1Open the multipurpose feeder.

2Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Load paper with the printable side faceup.

•Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple ﬁnisher is installed or not.

Without an optional staple ﬁnisher With an optional staple ﬁnisher

One‑sided printing One‑sided printing

Loading paper and specialty media 37

Without an optional staple ﬁnisher With an optional staple ﬁnisher

Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

•When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against

the right side of the paper guide.

One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing

•Load envelopes with the ﬂap side down and against the left side of the paper guide.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated

linings, or self‑stick adhesives.

5From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.

Linking trays

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > select a paper source.

2Set the same paper size and paper type for the trays that you are linking.

3From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Tray Conﬁguration

> Tray Linking.

4Tou ch Automatic.

To unlink trays, make sure that no trays have the same paper size and paper type settings.

Warning—Potential Damage: The temperature of the fuser varies according to the speciﬁed paper type. To

avoid printing issues, match the paper type setting in the printer with the paper loaded in the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media 38

Paper support

Supported paper sizes

Paper sizes supported by the printer

Paper size Standard or

optional 550‑sheet

tray

Optional

2100‑sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided

printing

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)

A5 LEF1

210 x 148 mm (8.3 x 5.8 in.)

A5 SEF

148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.)

X X

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)

Oﬁcio (Mexico)

216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Statement

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)

Letter

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

Folio

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

Universal

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) to

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)3

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)

X X

1 A5 long edge feed (LEF) is recommended over A5 short edge feed (SEF).

2 Envelopes wider than 101.6 mm (4.5 in.) may crease. This paper type must be tested for acceptability.

Paper support 39

Paper size Standard or

optional 550‑sheet

tray

Optional

2100‑sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided

printing

9 Envelope

98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.)

X X

10 Envelope2

105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.)

X X

DL Envelope2

110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.)

X X

C5 Envelope2

162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in.)

X X

B5 Envelope2

176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.)

X X

Other Envelope2

98.4 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to

176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.)

X X

1 A5 long edge feed (LEF) is recommended over A5 short edge feed (SEF).

2 Envelopes wider than 101.6 mm (4.5 in.) may crease. This paper type must be tested for acceptability.

Paper sizes supported by the output options or ﬁnishers

Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole

punch

210 x 297 mm

(8.3 x 11.7 in.)

A5 LEF

210 x 148 mm

(8.3 x 5.8 in.)

A5 SEF

148 x 210 mm

(5.8 x 8.3 in.)

XXX

105 x 148 mm

(4.1 x 5.8 in.)

XXXXX

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm

(7.2 x 10.1 in.)

XXX

Oﬁcio (Mexico)

216 x 340 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Paper support 40

Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole

punch

Statement

140 x 216 mm

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

XXX

Executive

184 x 267 mm

(7.3 x 10.5 in.)

XXX

Letter

216 x 279 mm

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal

216 x 356 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Folio

216 x 330 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Universal

105 x 148 mm

(4.1 x 5.8 in.) to

216 x 356 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

XXXXX

7 3/4 Envelope

(Monarch)

98 x 191 mm

(3.9 x 7.5 in.)

X XXXXX

9 Envelope

98 x 225 mm

(3.9 x 8.9 in.)

X XXXXX

10 Envelope

105 x 241 mm

(4.1 x 9.5 in.)

X XXXXX

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm

(4.3 x 8.7 in.)

X XXXXX

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm

(6.4 x 9 in.)

X XXXXX

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm

(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

X XXXXX

Paper support 41

Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole

punch

Other Envelopes

98.4 x 162 mm

(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to

176 x 250 mm

(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

X XXXXX

Supported paper types

Paper types supported by the printer

Paper type Standard or

optional 550‑sheet

tray

Optional

2100‑sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided printing

Plain paper

Card stock X

Transparency1X X

Labels X X

Bond

Envelope X X

Rough envelope X X

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper X

Light X

Heavy X

Rough/Cotton X

Custom type [x] X

1 To prevent transparencies from sticking together, print up to 20 pages only. Print the succeeding pages after three

minutes.

Paper support 42

Paper types supported by the output options or ﬁnishers

Paper type Oset stacker 4‑bin

mailbox

Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch

Plain paper

Card stock XXXXXX

Transparencies X X XX

Labels XXXXXX

Bond

Envelope XXXXXX

Rough

envelope

XXXXXX

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper XXXXXX

Light XXXXXX

Heavy XXXXXX

Rough/Cotton XXXXXX

Custom type [x] XXXXXX

Supported paper weights

Paper weights supported by the printer

Paper type and weight Standard or

optional

550‑sheet tray

Optional

2100‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided printing

Plain paper or Bond1

60–176 g/m² grain long

(16–47‑lb bond)

1 Grain short is preferred for paper over 176 g/m² (47 lb).

2Pressure‑sensitive area must enter the printer ﬁrst.

3 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

Paper support 43

Paper type and weight Standard or

optional

550‑sheet tray

Optional

2100‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided printing

Card stock

203 g/m² grain long (125‑lb

bond)

Card stock

199 g/m² grain long (110‑lb

bond)

Card stock

176 g/m² grain long (65‑lb

bond)

Transparency

138–146 g/m² grain long

(37–39‑lb bond)

X X

Paper labels

180 g/m² (48‑lb bond)

Integrated forms2

140–175 g/m² (37–47‑lb

bond)

Integrated forms

75–135 g/m² (20–36‑lb

bond)

Envelopes3

60–105 g/m² (16–28‑lb

bond)

1 Grain short is preferred for paper over 176 g/m² (47 lb).

2Pressure‑sensitive area must enter the printer ﬁrst.

3 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

Paper weights supported by the output options or ﬁnishers

Paper type and

weight

Oset stacker 4‑bin

mailbox

Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch

Plain paper or

Bond

60–176 g/m²

grain long (16–

47‑lb bond)

X X XX

Plain paper or

Bond

60–90 g/m²

grain long (16–

24‑lb bond)

Paper support 44

Paper type and

weight

Oset stacker 4‑bin

mailbox

Staple ﬁnisher Staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch

Card stock

203 g/m² grain

long (125‑lb

bond)

X X XX

Card stock

199 g/m² grain

long (110‑lb

bond)

X X XX

Card stock

176 g/m² grain

long (65‑lb

bond)

XXXXXX

Card stock

163 g/m² grain

long (90‑lb

bond)

X X XX

Transparency

138–146 g/m²

grain long (37–

39‑lb bond)

X X XX

Paper labels

180 g/m² (48‑lb

bond)

XXXXXX

Integrated forms

140–175 g/m²

(37–47‑lb bond)

XXXXXX

Integrated forms

75–135 g/m²

(20–36‑lb bond)

XXXXXX

Envelopes

60–105 g/m²

(16–28‑lb bond)

XXXXXX

Paper support 45

Printing

Printing from a computer

Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before printing the

document.

1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.

2If necessary, adjust the settings.

3Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device

Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print

LexmarkTM Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.

1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.

Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see

the documentation that came with the application.

2Select a printer.

3Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service

Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on AndroidTM version 5.0 or later.

It allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certiﬁed printer.

Note: Make sure that you download the Mopria Print Service application from the Google PlayTM store and

enable it in the mobile device.

1From your Android mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your ﬁle

manager.

2Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Tap .

Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint

The AirPrint software feature is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices

to an AirPrint‑certiﬁed printer.

Printing 46

Notes:

•Make sure that the Apple device and the printer are connected to the same network. If the network has

multiple wireless hubs, then make sure that both devices are connected to the same subnet.

•This application is supported only in some Apple devices.

1From your mobile device, select a document from your ﬁle manager or launch a compatible application.

2Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Wi‑Fi Direct®

Wi‑Fi Direct® is a printing service that lets you print to any Wi‑Fi Direct‑ready printer.

Note: Make sure that the mobile device is connected to the printer wireless network. For more information,

see “Connecting a mobile device to the printer” on page 169.

1From your mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your ﬁle manager.

2Depending on your mobile device, do one of the following:

•Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Print the document.

Printing from a ﬂash drive

1Insert the ﬂash drive.

Printing 47

Notes:

•If you insert the ﬂash drive when an error message appears, then the printer ignores the ﬂash drive.

•If you insert the ﬂash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the

display.

2From the display, touch the document that you want to print.

If necessary, conﬁgure other print settings.

3Send the print job.

To print another document, touch USB Drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the ﬂash drive or

the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.

Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types

Flash drives

•Lexar JumpDrive S70 (16GB and 32GB)

•SanDisk Cruzer (16GB and 32GB)

•PNY Attache (16GB and 32GB)

Notes:

–The printer supports high‑speed USB ﬂash drives with full‑speed standard.

–USB ﬂash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system.

File types

Documents

•PDF (version 1.7 or earlier)

•HTML

Printing 48

•XPS

•Microsoft ﬁle formats (.doc, .docx, .xls, .xlsx, .ppt, .pptx)

Images

•.dcx

•.gif

•.JPEG or .jpg

•.bmp

•.pcx

•.TIFF or .tif

•.webp

Conﬁguring conﬁdential jobs

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Security > Conﬁdential Print Setup

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Use To

Max Invalid PIN Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name are deleted.

Conﬁdential Job

Expiration

Set the expiration time for conﬁdential print jobs.

Note: Conﬁdential held jobs are stored in the printer until they are released or

deleted manually.

Repeat Job Expiration Set the expiration time for a repeat print job.

Note: Repeat held jobs are stored in the printer memory for reprinting.

Verify Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy before printing the remaining

copies.

Note: Verify jobs print one copy to check if it is satisfactory before printing the

remaining copies.

Reserve Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs.

Note: Reserve held jobs are automatically deleted after printing.

Require All Jobs to be

Held

Set the printer to hold all print jobs.

Keep duplicate

documents

Set the printer to print all documents with the same ﬁle name.

Printing conﬁdential and other held jobs

For Windows users

1With a document open, click File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

Printing 49

3Click Print and Hold.

4Select Use Print and Hold, and then assign a user name.

5Select the print job type (Conﬁdential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify).

If you select Conﬁdential, then secure the print job with a personal identiﬁcation number (PIN).

6Click OK or Print.

7From the printer home screen, release the print job.

•For conﬁdential print jobs, touch Held jobs > select your user name > Conﬁdential > enter the PIN >

select the print job > conﬁgure the settings > Print.

•For other print jobs, touch Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > conﬁgure the settings

> Print.

For Macintosh users

Using AirPrint

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose PIN Printing.

3Enable Print with PIN, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.

4Click Print.

5From the printer home screen, release the print job. Touch Held jobs > select your computer name >

Conﬁdential > enter the PIN > select the print job > Print.

Using the print driver

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose Print and Hold.

3Choose Conﬁdential Print, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.

4Click Print.

5From the printer home screen, release the print job. Touch Held jobs > select your computer name >

Conﬁdential > select the print job > enter the PIN > Print.

Printing from a Cloud Connector proﬁle

1From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

2Select a cloud service provider, and then select a proﬁle.

Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle, see “Creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle” on page 23.

3Tou ch Print, and then select a ﬁle.

If necessary, change the settings.

Note: Make sure to select a supported ﬁle.

4Print the document.

Printing 50

Printing a font sample list

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Print > Print Fonts.

2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PS Fonts.

Printing a directory list

From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Print > Print Directory.

Canceling a print job

From the printer control panel

1From the home screen, touch Job Queue.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home screen.

2Select the job to cancel.

From the computer

1Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:

•Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.

•From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.

2Select the job to cancel.

Printing 51

Copying

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Making copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and output have the same paper

size.

2From the home screen, touch Copy, and then specify the number of copies.

If necessary, adjust the copy settings.

3Copy the document.

Note: To make a quick copy, from the control panel, press .

Copying photos

1Place a photo on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Content > Content Type > Photo.

3Tou ch Content Source, and then select the setting that best matches the original photo.

4Copy the photo.

Copying 52

Copying on letterhead

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Copy From > select the size of the original document.

3Tou ch Copy To, and then select the paper source that contains the letterhead.

If you loaded the letterhead into the multipurpose feeder, then navigate to:

Copy To > Multipurpose Feeder > select a paper size > Letterhead

4Copy the document.

Copying on both sides of the paper

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Sides.

3Adjust the settings.

4Copy the document.

Reducing or enlarging copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Scale > specify a scale value

Note: Changing the size of the original document or output after setting Scale restores the scale value to

Auto.

3Copy the document.

Collating copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Collate > On [1,2,1,2,1,2].

3Copy the document.

Placing separator sheets between copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Separator Sheets.

3Adjust the settings.

4Send the copy job.

Copying 53

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Copy > Pages per Side.

3Adjust the settings.

4Copy the document.

Creating a copy shortcut

1From the home screen, touch Copy.

2Conﬁgure the settings, and then touch .

3Create a shortcut.

Copying 54

E-mailing

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings

Conﬁgure the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings to send a scanned document through e-mail. The

settings vary with each e‑mail service provider.

Before you begin, make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the network is connected to

the Internet.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > E‑mail.

3From the E‑mail Setup section, conﬁgure the settings.

Notes:

•For more information on the password, see the list of e‑mail service providers.

•For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider and ask for the settings.

4Click Save.

E-mailing 55

Using the Settings menu in the printer

1From the home screen, touch Settings > E‑mail > E‑mail Setup.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Notes:

•For more information on the password, see the list of e‑mail service providers.

•For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider and ask for the settings.

E‑mail service providers

•AOL Mail

•Comcast Mail

•Gmail

•iCloud Mail

•Mail.com

•NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)

•NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)

•NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)

•Outlook Live or Microsoft 365

•QQ Mail

•Sina Mail

•Sohu Mail

•Yah o o ! M a i l

•Zoho Mail

Notes:

•If you encounter errors using the settings provided, then contact your e‑mail service provider.

•For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider.

AOL Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.aol.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

E-mailing 56

Setting Value

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the AOL Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then click Generate app password.

Comcast Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.comcast.net

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Account password

GmailTM

Note: Make sure that two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled on your Google account. To enable two‑step

veriﬁcation, go to the Google Account Security page, log in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to

Google” section, click 2‑Step Veriﬁcation.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.gmail.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password App password

Notes:

•To create an app password, go to the Google Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to Google” section, click

App passwords.

•“App passwords” shows only if two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled.

E-mailing 57

iCloud Mail

Note: Make sure that two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled on your account.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.me.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the iCloud Account Management

page, log in to your account, and then from the Security section, click

Generate Password.

Mail.com

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Account password

NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.126.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

E-mailing 58

Setting Value

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.163.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.yeah.net

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

E-mailing 59

Setting Value

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

Outlook Live or Microsoft 365

These settings apply to outlook.com and hotmail.com e‑mail domains, and Microsoft 365 accounts.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.oce365.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Account password or app password

Notes:

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation disabled, use your account

password.

•For outlook.com or hotmail.com accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation

enabled, use an app password. To create an app password, go to the

Outlook Live Account Management page, and then log in to your

account.

Note: For additional setup options for business using Microsoft 365, go to the Microsoft 365 help page.

QQ Mail

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the QQ Mail

home page, click Settings > Account. From the POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service

section, enable either POP3/SMTP service or IMAP/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.qq.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

E-mailing 60

Setting Value

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Authorization code

Note: To generate an authorization code, from the QQ Mail home page, click

Settings > Account, and then from the

POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service section, click

Generate authorization code.

Sina Mail

Note: Make sure that the POP3/SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the

Sina Mail home page, click Settings > More settings > User‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sina.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Authorization code

Note: To create an authorization code, from the e‑mail home page, click

Settings > More settings > User‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable

Authorization code status.

Sohu Mail

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the Sohu

Mail home page, click Options > Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service

or POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sohu.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

E-mailing 61

Setting Value

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password Independent password

Note: The independent password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

Yaho o! Mai l

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.yahoo.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the Yahoo Account Security page,

Zoho Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.zoho.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address You r e‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address

E-mailing 62

Setting Value

Device Password Account password or app password

Notes:

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation disabled, use your account

password.

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation enabled, use an app password. To

create an app password, go to the Zoho Mail Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then from the Application‑Speciﬁc Passwords

section, click Generate New Password.

Sending an e-mail

Before you begin, make sure that the SMTP settings are conﬁgured. For more information, see “Conﬁguring

the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 55.

Using the control panel

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch E-mail, and then enter the needed information.

3If necessary, conﬁgure the output ﬁle type settings.

4Send the e-mail.

Using a shortcut number

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center > E‑mail.

3Select the shortcut number.

4Send the e‑mail.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

1From the home screen, touch E‑mail.

2Conﬁgure the settings, and then touch .

3Create a shortcut.

E-mailing 63

Faxing

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Setting up the printer to fax

Notes:

•The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.

•During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function that you plan to

set up later, and then select Continue.

•If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch cables or the printer

in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Faxing 64

Supported fax

Printer model Analog fax etherFAX1Fax server Fax over IP (FoIP)2

MX822ade

MX822adtfe

MX822adxe

MX822de X

MX826ade

MX826adtfe

MX826adxe

MX826de X

XM7355

XM7335b

XM7335bi X

XM7335i X

XM7370

XM7370i X

1 Needs a subscription. For more information, go to https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark or contact the place where

you purchased the printer.

2 Needs an installed license bundle. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Setting up the fax function using analog fax

Notes:

•This feature is available only in some printer models.

•Some connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.

•If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.

•If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then use the control panel to set up fax.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch cables or the printer

in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Faxing 65

Using the Settings menu in the printer

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.

3Conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Setting up the fax function using etherFAX

Notes:

•The printer ﬁrmware must be updated to the latest version. For more information, see “Updating

ﬁrmware” on page 318.

•An appropriate license bundle must be installed in your printer. For more information, contact etherFAX.

•Make sure that you have registered your printer to the etherFAX portal. For more information, go to

https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark.

•The printer serial number is required on registration. To locate the serial number, see “Finding the printer

serial number” on page 11.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Faxing 66

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.

Note: Fax Setup appears only if Fax Mode is set to Fax.

3In the Fax Name ﬁeld, type a unique name.

4In the Fax Number ﬁeld, enter the fax number that etherFAX provided.

5From the Fax Transport menu, select etherFAX.

6Apply the changes.

Setting up the fax function using fax server

Notes:

•This feature lets you send fax messages to a fax service provider that supports e‑mail receiving.

•This feature supports outgoing fax messages only. To support fax receive, make sure that you have a

device‑based fax, such as analog fax, etherFAX, or Fax over IP (FoIP), conﬁgured in your printer.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax.

3From the Fax Mode menu, select Fax Server, and then click Save.

4Click Fax Server Setup.

5In the To Format ﬁeld, type [#]@myfax.com, where [#] is the fax number and myfax.com is the fax

provider domain.

Notes:

•If necessary, conﬁgure the Reply Address, Subject, or Message ﬁelds.

•To let the printer receive fax messages, enable the device‑based fax receive setting. Make sure that

you have a device‑based fax conﬁgured.

6Click Save.

7Click Fax Server E‑mail Settings, and then do either of the following:

•Enable Use E‑mail SMTP Server.

Note: If the E‑mail SMTP settings are not conﬁgured, then see “Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings”

on page 55.

•Conﬁgure the SMTP settings. For more information, contact your e‑mail service provider.

8Apply the changes.

Faxing 67

Setting up fax using a standard telephone line

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 65.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Notes:

•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (set Auto Answer to On) or manually (set Auto

Answer to O).

•If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a speciﬁed number of rings.

Faxing 68

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for

the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes

automatically.

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that have EXT and line ports.

•Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

•Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.

•Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.

Faxing 69

Connected to dierent wall jacks

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.

Notes:

•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.

•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering

machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to 6.

Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks

and plugs

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 65.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Faxing 70

The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ‑11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility

is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or

region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug

from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Part name Part number

Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

3If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ‑11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it

directly to the telephone adapter.

Faxing 71

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone

number is assigned a dierent ring pattern.

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 65.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls >

Answer On.

2Select a ring pattern.

Setting the fax date and time

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time > Conﬁgure.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Conﬁguring daylight saving time

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time > Conﬁgure.

2In the Time Zone menu, select (UTC+user) Custom.

3Conﬁgure the settings.

Sending a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

Using the control panel

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.

If necessary, adjust the settings.

3Send the fax.

Using the computer

Before you begin, make sure that the fax driver is installed. For more information, see “Installing the fax driver”

on page 316.

For Windows users

1From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.

2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

Faxing 72

3Click Fax > Enable fax > Always display settings prior to faxing, and then enter the recipient number.

If necessary, conﬁgure other fax settings.

4Send the fax.

For Macintosh users

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select the printer that has ‑ Fax added after its name.

3In the To ﬁeld, enter the recipient number.

If necessary, conﬁgure other fax settings.

4Send the fax.

Scheduling a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Fax > To > enter the fax number > Done.

3Tou ch Send Time, conﬁgure the date and time, and then touch OK.

4Send the fax.

Creating a fax destination shortcut

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Fax > To.

2Enter the recipient number, and then touch Done.

3Tou ch .

4Create a shortcut.

Changing the fax resolution

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.

3Tou ch Resolution, and then adjust the setting.

4Send the fax.

Faxing 73

Adjusting the fax darkness

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.

3Tou ch Darkness, and then adjust the setting.

4Send the fax.

Printing a fax log

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Fax.

2Tou ch Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls.

2Set Block No Name Fax to On.

Holding faxes

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Holding Faxes.

2Select a mode.

Forwarding a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1Create a destination shortcut.

aFrom the home screen, touch Shortcut Center.

Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.

bSelect a printer function, and then touch Create Shortcut.

cConﬁgure the settings, and then touch Save.

dType a unique shortcut name.

eTou ch OK.

Note: Take note of the shortcut number.

2From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls.

Faxing 74

3Tou ch Fax Forwarding and then touch Forward or Print and Forward.

4Tou ch Forward to, and then select a destination.

5Select a destination type, and then enter the shortcut number of the destination.

Faxing 75

Scanning

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Scanning to a computer

Before you begin, make sure that:

•The printer ﬁrmware is updated. For more information, see “Updating ﬁrmware” on page 318.

•The computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

For Windows users

Using Lexmark ScanBack Utility

1From the computer, run Lexmark ScanBack Utility, and then click Next.

Note: To download the utility, go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.

2Click Setup, and then add the printer IP address.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

3Click Close > Next.

4Select the size of the original document, and then click Next.

5Select a ﬁle format and scan resolution, and then click Next.

6Type a unique scan proﬁle name, and then click Next.

7Browse to the location you want to save the scanned document, create a ﬁle name, and then click Next.

Note: To reuse the scan proﬁle, enable Create Shortcut, and then create a unique shortcut name.

8Click Finish.

Scanning 76

9Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

10 From the printer home screen, touch Scan Proﬁles, and then select a scan proﬁle.

Note: Make sure that Scan Proﬁles is enabled. From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Visible

Home Screen Icons > Scan Proﬁles > Display.

Using Windows Fax and Scan

Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see “Adding printers to a

computer” on page 316.

1Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

2From the computer, open Windows Fax and Scan.

3From the Source menu, select a scanner source.

4If necessary, change the scan settings.

5Scan the document.

For Macintosh users

Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see “Adding printers to a

computer” on page 316.

1Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

2From the computer, do either of the following:

•Open Image Capture.

•Open Printers & Scanners, and then select a printer. Click Scan > Open Scanner.

3From the Scanner window, do one or more of the following:

•Select where you want to save the scanned document.

•Select the size of the original document.

•To scan from the ADF, select Document Feeder from the Scan Menu or enable Use Document Feeder.

•If necessary, conﬁgure the scan settings.

4Click Scan.

Scanning to an FTP server

1Load the original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch FTP, and then enter the needed information.

3If necessary, conﬁgure other FTP settings.

4Send the FTP job.

Scanning 77

Scanning to a network folder

1Load the document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Scan Center.

Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.

3Do either of the following:

•Select a destination.

Note: For SFTP, set the port number to 22.

•Use a shortcut by touching , and then selecting the shortcut from the list.

4Scan the document.

Creating an FTP shortcut

1From the home screen, touch FTP.

2Enter the FTP server address, and then touch .

3Create a shortcut.

Scanning to a ﬂash drive

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2Insert the ﬂash drive.

3Tou ch Scan to USB and adjust the settings if necessary.

Notes:

•To save the scanned document to a folder, touch Scan to, select a folder, and then touch Scan Here.

•If the USB Drive screen does not appear, then touch USB Drive on the control panel.

Scanning 78

4Scan the document.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the ﬂash drive or

the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.

Scanning to a Cloud Connector proﬁle

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

3Select a cloud service provider, and then select a proﬁle.

Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle, see “Creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle” on page 23.

4Tou ch Scan, and then assign a ﬁlename and destination folder.

5Tou ch Scan Here.

If necessary, change the scan settings.

6Scan the document.

Scanning 79

Understanding the printer menus

Menu map

Device •Preferences

•Eco‑Mode

•Remote Operator Panel

•Notiﬁcations

•Power Management

•Anonymous Data Collection

•Accessibility

•Restore Factory Defaults

•Maintenance

•Visible Home Screen Icons

•About this Printer

Print •Layout

•Finishing

•Setup

•Quality

•Job Accounting

•XPS

•PDF

•PostScript

•PCL

•HTML

•Image

Paper •Tray Conﬁguration

•Media Conﬁguration

•Bin Conﬁguration

Copy Copy Defaults

Fax Fax Defaults

E‑mail •E‑mail Setup

•E‑mail Defaults

•Web Link Setup

FTP FTP Defaults

USB Drive •Flash Drive Scan •Flash Drive Print

Network/Ports •Network Overview

•Wireless

•Wi‑Fi Direct

•Ethernet

•TCP/IP

•SNMP

•IPSec

•802.1x

•LPD Conﬁguration

•HTTP/FTP Settings

•ThinPrint

•USB

•Restrict external network access

Security •Login Methods

•Schedule USB Devices

•Security Audit Log

•Login Restrictions

•Conﬁdential Print Setup

•Disk Encryption

•Erase Temporary Data Files

•Solutions LDAP Settings

•Miscellaneous

Reports •Menu Settings Page

•Device

•Print

•Shortcuts

•Fax

•Network

Understanding the printer menus 80

Help •Print All Guides

•Mono Quality Guide

•Connection Guide

•Copy Guide

•E‑mail Guide

•Fax Guide

•FTP Guide

•Information Guide

•Media Guide

•Moving Guide

•Print Quality Guide

•Supplies Guide

Troubleshooting Print Quality Test Pages Cleaning the scanner

Device

Preferences

Menu item Description

Display Language Set the language of the text that appears on the display.

Country/Region Identify the country or region that the printer is conﬁgured to

operate.

Run initial setup

O*

Run the setup wizard.

Keyboard

Keyboard Type

Select a language as a keyboard type.

Note: All the Keyboard Type values may not appear or may

require special hardware be installed to appear.

Displayed information

Display Text 1 (IP Address*)

Display Text 2 (Date/Time*)

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Specify the information to appear on the home screen.

Date and Time

Conﬁgure

Current Date and Time

Manually Set Date and Time

Date Format (MM‑DD‑YYYY*)

Time Format (12 hour A.M./P.M.*)

Time Zone (UTC‑5:00*)

Network Time Protocol

Enable NTP (On*)

NTP Server

Enable Authentication

Conﬁgure the printer date and time and network time protocol.

Paper Sizes

U.S.*

Metric

Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.

Note: The country or region selected in the initial setup

wizard determines the initial paper size setting.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 81

Menu item Description

Screen Brightness

20–100% (100*)

Adjust the brightness of the display.

Flash Drive Access

Enabled*

Disabled

Enable access to the ﬂash drive.

Allow Background Removal

O

On*

Specify whether background removal is allowed.

Allow Custom Job scans

O

On*

Specify whether the Custom Job Scanning setting appears for

copy, scan, and fax.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is

installed.

One Page Flatbed Scanning

O*

Set the printer to scan any type of job involving the scanner

glass as a single page.

Note: The printer returns to the home screen after

performing a single ﬂatbed scan instead of displaying

prompts.

Output Lighting

O

On*

Enable the integrated output light or indicator light of an

optional output bin.

Audio Feedback

Button Feedback (On*)

Volume (5*)

•Enable audio feedback for button presses, panel

interactions, paper loaded prompts, and error notiﬁcations.

•Adjust the feedback volume.

Screen Timeout

5–300 seconds (60*)

Set the idle time before the display shows the home screen or

before the printer logs out a user account automatically.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Eco-Mode

Menu item Description

Sides

1‑Sided*

2‑Sided

Specify whether to print on one side or two sides of the paper.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 82

Menu item Description

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Toner Darkness

1–10 (8*)

Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.

Copy

Sides

1 sided to 1 sided*

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original

document.

Copy

Pages per Side

O*

2 Portrait pages

4 Portrait pages

2 Landscape pages

4 Landscape pages

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original

document.

Copy

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Determine the darkness of the scanned text images.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Remote Operator Panel

Menu item Description

External VNC Connection

Don’t Allow*

Allow

Connect an external Virtual Network Computing (VNC) client

to the remote control panel.

Authentication Type

None*

Standard Authentication

Set the authentication type when accessing the VNC client

server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 83

Menu item Description

VNC Password Specify the password to connect to the VNC client server.

Note: This menu item appears only if Authentication Type is

set to Standard Authentication.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Notiﬁcations

Menu item Description

Error Lighting

O

On*

Set the indicator light to come on when a printer error occurs.

ADF Loaded Beep

O

On*

Enable a sound when loading paper into the ADF.

Alarm Control

O

Single*

Continuous

Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the printer

requires user intervention.

Supplies

Show Supply Estimates

Show estimates*

Do not show estimates

Show the estimated status of the supplies.

Supplies

Cartridge Alarm (O*)

Staple Alarm (O*)

Hole Punch Alarm (O*)

Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the toner

cartridge is low, the staple cartridge is empty, or the hole punch

receptacle is full or missing.

Note: Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm appear only when

output options are installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 84

Menu item Description

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Primary SMTP Gateway

Primary SMTP Gateway Port (25*)

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port (25*)

SMTP Timeout (30 seconds*)

Reply Address

Always use SMTP default Reply

Address(O*)

Use SSL/TLS(Disabled*)

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate(On*)

SMTP Server Authentication(No

authentication required*)

Device‑Initiated E‑mail(None*)

User‑Initiated E‑mail(None*)

Use Active Directory Device

Credentials(O*)

Device Userid

Device Password

Kerberos 5 REALM

NTLM Domain

Disable "SMTP server not set up" (O*)

Conﬁgure the e‑mail settings of the printer.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

Setup E-mail Lists and Alerts

E‑mail List 1

E‑mail List 2

E-mail Events

Specify the e‑mail addresses and enable the e‑mail alert

events.

Note: This menu item appears only in the Embedded Web

Server.

Error Prevention

ADF Multifeed Sensor

O

On*

Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of media at

once.

Error Prevention

Jam Assist

O

On*

Set the printer to ﬂush blank pages or pages with partial prints

automatically after a jammed page has been cleared.

Error Prevention

Auto Continue

O

On* (5 seconds)

Let the printer continue processing or printing a job

automatically after clearing certain printer conditions that

require user intervention.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 85

Menu item Description

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Reboot when idle

Reboot always*

Reboot never

Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Max Auto Reboots

1–20 (2*)

Set the number of automatic reboots that the printer can

perform.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Auto Reboot Window

1–525600 seconds (720*)

Set the time before the printer performs an automatic reboot.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Auto Reboot Counter

Show a read‑only information of the reboot counter.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Reset Auto Reboot Counter

Cancel

Continue

Reset Auto Reboot Counter.

Error Prevention

Display Short Paper Error

Auto‑clear*

Set the printer to show a message when a short paper error

occurs.

Note: Short paper refers to the size of the paper loaded.

Error Prevention

Page Protect

O*

Set the printer to process the entire page into the memory

before printing it.

Jam Content Recovery

Jam Recovery

O

Auto*

Set the printer to reprint jammed pages.

Jam Content Recovery

Scanner Jam Recovery

Job level

Page level*

Specify how to restart a scan job after resolving a paper jam.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 86

Power Management

Menu item Description

Sleep Mode Proﬁle

Print from Sleep Mode

Stay awake after printing

Enter Sleep Mode after printing*

Set the printer to stay in Ready mode or return to Sleep mode

after printing.

Timeouts

Sleep Mode

1–120 minutes (15*)

Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep

mode.

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout

Disabled

1 hour

2 hours

3 hours

6 hours

1 day

2 days

3 days*

1 week

2 weeks

1 month

Set the time before the printer turns o.

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout on Connection

Hibernate

Do Not Hibernate*

Set Hibernate Timeout to turn o the printer while an active

Ethernet connection exists.

Schedule Power Modes

Schedules

Add New Schedule

Schedule the printer when to enter Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Anonymous Data Collection

Menu item Description

Anonymous Data Collection

Device Usage and Performance

Information

None*

Send printer usage and performance information to Lexmark.

Note: Anonymous Data Send Time appears only when you set

Anonymous Data Collection to Device Usage and Performance.

Anonymous Data Send Time

Start Time

Stop Time

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 87

Accessibility

Menu item Description

Duplicate Key Strike Interval

0–5 (0*)

Set the interval in seconds during which the printer ignores duplicate key

presses on an attached keyboard.

Key Repeat Initial Delay

0.25–5 (1*)

Set the initial length of delay in seconds before a repeating key starts

repeating.

Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the

printer.

Key Repeat Rate

0.5–30 (30*)

Set the number of presses per second for a repeating key.

Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the

printer.

Prolong Screen Timeout

O*

Let the user remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout

timer when it expires instead of returning to the home screen.

Headphone Volume

1–10 (5*)

Adjust the headphone volume.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone is attached to

the printer.

Enable Voice Guidance When

Headphone Is Attached

O*

Enable Voice Guidance when a headphone is attached to the printer.

Speak Passwords/PINs

O*

Set the printer to read out loud passwords or personal identiﬁcation

numbers.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is

attached to the printer.

Speech Rate

Very Slow

Slow

Normal*

Fast

Faster

Very Fast

Rapid

Very Rapid

Fastest

Set the Voice Guidance speech rate.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is

attached to the printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 88

Restore Factory Defaults

Menu item Description

Restore Settings

Restore all settings

Restore printer settings

Restore network settings

Restore fax settings

Restore app settings

Restore the printer factory default settings.

Maintenance

Conﬁguration Menu

Menu item Description

USB Conﬁguration

USB PnP

Change the USB driver mode of the printer to improve its

compatibility with a personal computer.

USB Conﬁguration

USB Scan to Local

O

On*

Set whether the USB device driver enumerates as a USB

Simple device (single interface) or as a USB Composite device

(multiple interfaces).

USB Conﬁguration

USB Speed

Full

Auto*

Set the USB port to run at full speed and disable its high‑speed

capabilities.

Tray Conﬁguration

Size Sensing

Tray [x] Sensing

O

On*

Set the tray to sense automatically the paper size loaded into

it.

Tray Conﬁguration

Tray Linking

Automatic*

O

Set the printer to link the trays that have the same paper type

and paper size settings.

Tray Conﬁguration

Show Tray Insert Message

O

Only for unknown sizes*

Always

Display a message to select paper size and type after inserting

the tray.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 89

Menu item Description

Tray Conﬁguration

A5 Loading

Short Edge

Long Edge*

Determine the default loading orientation for the A5 size paper

in all paper sources.

Tray Conﬁguration

Paper Prompts

Auto*

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Set the paper source that the user ﬁlls when a prompt to load

paper appears.

Tray Conﬁguration

Envelope Prompts

Auto*

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Envelope

Set the paper source that the user ﬁlls when a prompt to load

envelope appears.

Tray Conﬁguration

Action for Prompts

Prompt user*

Continue

Use current

Set the printer to resolve paper- or envelope-related change

prompts.

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Event Log

Event Log Summary

HealthCheck Statistics

Print reports about printer menu settings, status, and event

logs.

Supply Usage And Counters

Clear Supply Usage History

Reset the supply page counter or view the total printed pages.

Printer Emulations

PPDS Emulation

O*

Set the printer to recognize and use the PPDS data stream.

Printer Emulations

PS Emulation

O

On*

Set the printer to recognize and use the PS data stream.

Printer Emulations

Emulator Security

Page Timeout

0–60 (60*)

Set the page timeout during emulation.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 90

Menu item Description

Printer Emulations

Emulator Security

Reset Emulator After Job

O*

Reset the emulator after a print job.

Printer Emulations

Emulator Security

Disable Printer Message Access

O

On*

Disable access to printer message during emulation.

Fax Conﬁguration

Fax Low Power Support

Disable Sleep

Permit Sleep

Auto*

Set fax to enter Sleep mode whenever the printer determines

that it should.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Fax Conﬁguration

Fax Storage Location

NAND

Disk*

Set the storage location for all faxes.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only when a hard disk is

installed.

•This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Print Conﬁguration

Font Sharpening

0–150 (24*)

Set a text point-size value below which the high‑frequency

screens are used when printing font data.

For example, if the value is 24, then all fonts sized 24 points or

less use the high‑frequency screens.

Print Conﬁguration

Print Density

1–5 (3*)

Copy Density

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the toner density when printing or copying documents.

Print Conﬁguration

A4 Fuser

Compress*

Clip

Set the fuser behavior when printing on a letter-size paper.

Device Operations

Quiet Mode

O*

Set the printer to operate in Quiet Mode.

Note: Enabling this setting slows down the overall

performance of the printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 91

Menu item Description

Device Operations

Safe Mode

O*

Set the printer to operate in a special mode, in which it attempts

to continue oering as much functionality as possible, despite

known issues.

For example, when set to On, and the duplex motor is

nonfunctional, the printer performs one‑sided printing of the

documents even if the job is two‑sided printing.

Device Operations

Minimum Copy Memory

20 MB*

30 MB

50 MB

80 MB

100 MB

Set the minimum memory allocation for storing copy jobs.

Device Operations

Clear Custom Status

Erase user‑deﬁned strings for the Default or Alternate custom

messages.

Device Operations

Clear all remotely‑installed messages

Erase messages that were remotely installed.

Device Operations

Automatically Display Error Screens

O

On*

Show existing error messages on the display after the printer

remains inactive on the home screen for a length of time equal

to the Screen Timeout setting.

Device Operations

Honor orientation on fast path copy

O*

Enable the printer to use the orientation setting under the Copy

menu when sending quick copy jobs.

App Conﬁguration

LES Applications

O

On*

Enable the Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications.

Notes:

•When set to On, this setting does not aect built‑in

applications.

•This menu item appears only in the Embedded Web

Server.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Scanner Manual Registration

Print Quick Test

Print a Quick Test target page.

Note: Make sure that the margin spacing on the target page

is uniform all the way around the target. If it is not, then the

printer margins must be reset.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Scanner Manual Registration

Front ADF Registration

Rear ADF Registration

Flatbed Registration

Manually register the ﬂatbed and ADF after replacing the ADF,

scanner glass, or controller board.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 92

Menu item Description

Scanner Conﬁguration

Reset Maintenance Counter

Resetting ADF Maintenance Counter

Reset the counter after replacing the ADF maintenance kit.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Edge Erase

Flatbed Edge Erase (3*)

ADF Edge Erase (3*)

Set the size, in millimeters, of the no‑print area around an ADF

or ﬂatbed scan job.

Scanner Conﬁguration

ADF Deskew

ADF Electronic Deskew(On*)

Reduce skewing of documents that are scanned from the ADF.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Disable Scanner

Enabled*

Disabled

ADF Disabled

Disable the scanner when it is not working properly.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Ti Byte Order

CPU Endianness*

Little Endian

Big Endian

Set the byte order of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Exact Ti Rows Per Strip

On*

O

Set the RowsPerStrip tag value of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Out of Service Erase

Menu item Description

Out of Service Erase

Memory Last Sanitized

Hard Disk Last Sanitized

Show information on when the printer memory or

hard disk was last sanitized.

Note: Hard Disk Last Sanitized appears only when a

hard disk is installed.

Out of Service Erase

Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory

Erase all printer and network settings

Erase all apps and app settings

Erase all shortcuts and shortcut settings

Sanitize all information on hard disk

Erase downloads (Erase all macros, fonts, PPOs, etc.)

Erase buered jobs

Erase Held jobs

Clear all information on non‑volatile memory and

information on the hard disk.

Note: Sanitize all information on hard disk appears

only when a hard disk is installed.

Understanding the printer menus 93

Visible Home Screen Icons

Menu Description

Visible Home Screen Icons

Copy

E‑mail

Fax

Status/Supplies

Job Queue

Change Language

Shortcut Center

Address Book

Bookmarks

Held Jobs

USB

FTP

Scan Proﬁles

App Proﬁles

Display Customization

Scan Center

Card Copy

Specify which icons to show on the home screen.

About this Printer

Menu item Description

Asset Tag Show the serial number of the printer.

Printer’s Location Identify the printer location. The maximum length is 63 characters.

Contact Personalize the printer name. The maximum length is 63 characters.

Export Conﬁguration File to USB Export the conﬁguration ﬁle to a ﬂash drive.

Export Compressed Logs to USB Export the compressed log ﬁles to a ﬂash drive.

Send Logs

Cancel

Send

Send diagnostic information to Lexmark.

Understanding the printer menus 94

Layout

Menu item Description

Sides

1‑Sided*

2‑Sided

Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper.

Flip Style

Long Edge*

Short Edge

Determine which side of the paper is bound when performing two‑sided printing.

Blank Pages

Do Not Print*

Print blank pages that are included in a print job.

Collate

O (1,1,1,2,2,2)

On (1,2,1,2,1,2)*

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence, particularly when printing multiple

copies of the job.

Separator Sheets

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Pages per Side Ordering

Horizontal*

Reverse Horizontal

Vertical

Reverse Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using the Pages per Side menu.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 95

Menu item Description

Pages per Side Orientation

Auto*

Landscape

Portrait

Specify the orientation of multiple page images when using the Pages per Side menu.

Pages per Side Border

None*

Solid

Print a border around each page image when using the Pages per Side menu.

Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Specify the number of copies for each print job.

Print Area

Normal*

Fit to page

Whole Page

Set the printable area on a sheet of paper.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Finishing

Menu item Description

Staple Job

O*

1 staple, top left corner

2 staples, left

1 staple, top right corner

2 staples, top

1 staple, bottom left corner

2 staples, bottom

1 staple, bottom right corner

2 staples, right

Specify the staple position for all print jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬁnisher is installed.

Staple Test

Start

Determine whether the staple ﬁnisher is functioning properly.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬁnisher is installed.

Hole Punch

O*

Punch holes along the edge of the printed output.

Note: This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher is installed.

Hole Punch Mode

2 holes

3 holes

4 holes

Set the hole punch mode for the printed output.

Notes:

•3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international

factory default setting.

•This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 96

Menu item Description

Oset Pages

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.

Notes:

•Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On

[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to O [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed

pages is oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.

•Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job

regardless of the number of copies printed.

•This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Setup

Menu item Description

Printer Language

PCL Emulation*

PS Emulation

Set the printer language.

Note: Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software

program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.

Job Waiting

O*

Preserve print jobs requiring supplies so that jobs not requiring the missing

supplies can print.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Job Hold Timeout

0–255 (30*)

Set the time in seconds that the printer waits for user intervention before

it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other

jobs in the print queue.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Download Target

RAM*

Disk

Specify where to save all permanent resources, such as fonts and macros,

that have been downloaded to the printer.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Resource Save

O*

Determine what the printer does with downloaded resources, such as

fonts and macros, when it receives a job that requires more than the

available memory.

Notes:

•When set to O, the printer retains downloaded resources only until

memory is needed. Resources associated with the inactive printer

language are deleted.

•When set to On, the printer preserves all the permanent

downloaded resources across all language switches. When

necessary, the printer shows memory full messages instead of

deleting permanent resources.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 97

Menu item Description

Print All Order

Alphabetical*

Newest First

Oldest First

Specify the order in which held and conﬁdential jobs are printed when Print

All is selected.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Quality

Menu item Description

Print Resolution

300 dpi

600 dpi*

1200 dpi

1200 Image Q

2400 Image Q

Set the resolution for the text and images on the printed output.

Note: Resolution is determined in dots per inch or image quality.

Pixel Boost

O*

Fonts

Horizontally

Vertically

Both directions

Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance text and

images.

Toner Darkness

1 to 10 (8*)

Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.

Halftone

Normal*

Detail

Enhance the printed output to have smoother lines with sharper edges.

Brightness

‑6 to 6 (0*)

Adjust the brightness of the printed output.

Contrast

0 to 5 (0*)

Adjust the contrast of the printed output.

Gray Correction

Auto*

Normal

Adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 98

Job Accounting

Menu item Description

Job Accounting

O*

Set the printer to create a log of the print jobs that it receives.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬂash memory or hard disk is

installed.

Accounting Log Frequency

Daily

Weekly

Monthly*

Specify how often the printer creates a log ﬁle.

Log Action at End of Frequency

None*

E‑mail Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Specify how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.

Note: The value deﬁned in Accounting Log Frequency determines when this

action is triggered.

Log Near Full Level

O

On (5)*

Specify the maximum size of the log ﬁle before the printer executes the Log

Action at Near Full.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬂash memory or hard disk is

installed.

Log Action at Near Full

None*

E‑mail Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But Current

Delete All Logs

Specify how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.

Note: The value deﬁned in Log Near Full Level determines when this action

is triggered.

Log Action at Full

None*

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But Current

Delete All Logs

Specify how the printer responds when hard disk usage reaches the maximum

limit (100MB).

URL to Post Log Specify where the printer posts job accounting logs.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 99

Menu item Description

E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.

Log File Preﬁx Specify the preﬁx for the log ﬁles.

Note: The current host name deﬁned in the TCP/IP menu is used as the

default log ﬁle preﬁx.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

XPS

Menu item Description

Print Error Pages

O*

Print a test page that contains information on errors.

Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the minimum stroke width of any job printed in 1200 dpi.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

PDF

Menu item Description

Scale To Fit

O*

Scale the page content to ﬁt the selected paper size.

Annotations

Do Not Print*

Specify whether to print annotations in the PDF.

Print PDF Error

O

On*

Enable the printing of PDF error.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

PostScript

Menu item Description

Print PS Error

O*

Print a page that describes the PostScript® error.

Note: When an error occurs, processing of the job stops, the printer

prints an error message, and the rest of the print job is ﬂushed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 100

Menu item Description

Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the minimum stroke width.

Notes:

•Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use the value directly.

•Jobs printed in 4800 CQ use half the value.

Lock PS Startup Mode

O

On*

Disable the SysStart ﬁle.

Image Smoothing

O*

Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images.

Note: This setting has no eect on images with a resolution of 300 dpi or

higher.

Font Priority

Resident*

Flash/Disk

Establish the font search order.

Notes:

•Resident sets the printer to search its memory for the requested font

before searching the ﬂash memory or printer hard disk.

•Flash/Disk sets the printer to search the ﬂash memory or printer hard

disk for the requested font before searching the printer memory.

•This menu item appears only when a ﬂash memory or hard disk is

installed.

Wait Timeout

O

On* (40 seconds)

Enable the printer to wait for more data before canceling a print job.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

PCL

Menu item Description

Font Source

Resident*

Disk

Flash

All

Choose the source which contains the default font selection.

Notes:

•Flash and Disk appear only when a ﬂash memory or hard disk is

installed.

•For Flash and Disk to appear, make sure that they are not read‑ or

write‑protected.

Font Name

Courier*

Select a font from the speciﬁed font source.

Symbol Set

10U PC‑8*

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Note: A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,

punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent

languages or speciﬁc programs such as math symbols for scientiﬁc text.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 101

Menu item Description

Pitch

0.08–100 (10*)

Specify the pitch for ﬁxed or monospaced fonts.

Note: Pitch refers to the number of ﬁxed‑space characters in a horizontal

inch of type.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Reverse Portrait*

Reverse Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Lines per Page

1–255

Specify the number of lines of text for each page printed through the PCL®

data stream.

Notes:

•This menu item activates vertical escapement that causes the

selected number of requested lines to print between the default

margins of the page.

•60 is the U.S. factory default setting. 64 is the international factory

default setting.

PCL5 Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the initial minimum stroke width of any job printed in 1200 dpi.

PCLXL Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

A4 Width

198 mm*

203 mm

Set the width of the logical page on A4‑size paper.

Note: Logical page is the space on the physical page where data is

printed.

Auto CR after LF

O*

Set the printer to perform a carriage return after a line feed control

command.

Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to move

the position of the cursor to the ﬁrst position on the same line.

Auto LF after CR

O*

Set the printer to perform a line feed after a carriage return control

command.

Tray Renumber

Assign MP Feeder

Assign Tray [x]

Assign Manual Paper

Assign Manual Envelope

View Factory Defaults

Restore Defaults

•Conﬁgure the printer to work with a dierent print driver or custom

application that uses a dierent set of source assignments to request a

given paper source.

•Show the factory default value assigned for each paper source.

•Restore the tray renumber values to their factory defaults.

Print Timeout

O

On* (90 seconds)

Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the speciﬁed

amount of time.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 102

HTML

Menu item Description

Font Name

Times*

Set the font to use when printing HTML documents.

Font Size

1–255 (12*)

Set the font size to use when printing HTML documents.

Scale

1–400% (100*)

Scale HTML documents for printing.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.

Margin Size

8–255 mm (19*)

Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Backgrounds

Do Not Print

Print*

Print background information or graphics in HTML documents.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Image

Menu item Description

Auto Fit

O*

Select the best available paper size and orientation setting for an image.

Note: When set to On, this menu item overrides the scaling and orientation

settings for the image.

Invert

O*

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Note: This menu item does not apply to GIF or JPEG image formats.

Scaling

Anchor Top Left

Best Fit*

Anchor Center

Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width

Adjust the image to ﬁt the printable area.

Note: When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 103

Paper

Tray Conﬁguration

Menu item Description

Default Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Set the paper source for all print jobs.

Paper Size/Type

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Specify the paper size or paper type loaded in each paper source.

Substitute Size

O

Statement/A5

Letter/A4

All Listed*

Set the printer to substitute a speciﬁed paper size if the requested size is not

loaded in any paper source.

Notes:

•O prompts the user to load the required paper size.

•Statement/A5 prints A5‑size document on statement when loading

statement and statement‑size jobs on A5 paper size when loading A5.

Statement/A5 appears only in the Embedded Web Server.

•Letter/A4 prints A4‑size document on letter when loading letter and

letter‑size jobs on A4 paper size when loading letter.

•All Listed substitutes Letter/A4.

Conﬁgure MP

Cassette*

Manual

First

Determine the behavior of the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

•Cassette conﬁgures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper

source.

•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual-feed print jobs.

•First conﬁgures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Media Conﬁguration

Universal Setup

Menu item Description

Units of Measure

Inches

Millimeters

Specify the unit of measurement for the universal paper.

Note: Inches is the U.S. factory default setting. Millimeters is the

international factory default setting.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 104

Menu item Description

Portrait Width

3–52 inches (8.5*)

76–1321 mm (216*)

Set the portrait width of the universal paper.

Portrait Height

3–52 inches (14*)

76.2–1321 mm (356*)

Set the portrait height of the universal paper.

Feed Direction

Short Edge*

Long Edge

Set the printer to pick paper from the short edge or long edge

direction.

Note: Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter

than the maximum width supported.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Custom Scan Sizes

Menu item Description

Custom Scan Size [x]

Scan Size Name

Width

1–8.5 inches (8.5*)

25.4–215.9 mm (215.9*)

Height

1–25 inches (14*)

25.4–635 mm (355.6*)

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

2 scans per side

O*

Assign a scan size name and conﬁgure the scan settings.

Understanding the printer menus 105

Media Types

Menu item Description

Plain

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light

Heavy

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [X]

Specify the texture, weight, and orientation of the paper.

Bin Conﬁguration

Menu item Description

Output Bin

Standard Bin*

Bin [x]

Specify the output bin.

Conﬁgure Bins

Mailbox*

Link

Link Optional

Type Assignment

Conﬁgure the mode of operation for the output bins.

Notes:

•Mailbox allows the standard bin and any optional bin to be selected

individually.

•Link allows all output bins to be linked together as though they were one

large bin.

•Link Optional treats all optional bins as one large output bin.

•Type Assignment assigns each paper type a bin or a linked bin set.

Custom Bin Names

Standard Bin

Bin [x]

Assign a name for the bin.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 106

Copy

Copy Defaults

Menu item Description

Content Type

Text

Text/Photo*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Sides

1 sided to 1 sided*

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original document.

Separator Sheets

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Pages per Side

O*

2 Portrait pages

4 Portrait pages

2 Landscape pages

4 Landscape pages

Specify the number of page images to print on one side of a sheet of paper.

Print Page Borders

O*

Place a border around each image when printing multiple pages on a single

page.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 107

Menu item Description

Collate

O [1,1,1,2,2,2]

On [1,2,1,2,1,2]*

Print multiple copies in sequence.

Oset Pages

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.

Notes:

•Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On

[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to O [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed pages

are oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.

•Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job

regardless of the number of copies printed.

•This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

Staple

O*

1 staple, top left corner

2 staples, left

1 staple, top right corner

2 staples, top

1 staple, bottom left corner

2 staples, bottom

1 staple, bottom right corner

2 staples, right

Specify the staple position for all print jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

Punch

O*

2 holes

3 holes

Set the punch mode for all print jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

“Copy from” Size Set the paper size of the original document.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

default setting.

“Copy to” Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Auto Size Match

Specify the paper source for the copy job.

Darkness

1 to 9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Number of Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Specify the number of copies.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 108

Menu item Description

Header/Footer

Left Header

Middle Header

Right Header

Left Footer

Middle Footer

Right Footer

Specify the header or footer information on the scanned image.

Overlay

Conﬁdential

Copy

Draft

Urgent

Custom

O*

Specify the overlay text to print on each copy.

Custom overlay Type the text for the Custom choice in Overlay menu.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Dropout

Color Dropout (None*)

Default Red Threshold (128*)

Default Green Threshold (128*)

Default Blue Threshold (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout

setting for that color.

Contrast

Best for content*

0–5

Specify the contrast for the scanned image.

Background Removal

Background Detection (Content‑based*)

Level (0*)

Remove the background color or image noise from the original

document.

Notes:

•Content-based removes the background color from the original

document .

•Fixed removes image noise from a photo.

Auto Center

O*

Align the content at the center of the page.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 109

Menu item Description

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the shadow detail in the original document.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Scan the original document from edge to edge.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Transparency Separators

O

On*

Insert a blank sheet between transparencies.

Allow Priority Copies

O

On*

Interrupt a print job to make copies.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Set the printer to scan the ﬁrst set of original documents using the speciﬁed

settings, and then scan the next set with the same or dierent settings.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save copy settings as a shortcut.

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned

from the ADF.

Sample copy

O*

Print a sample copy to check the quality before printing the remaining copies.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 110

Fax

Fax Defaults

Fax Mode

Menu item Description

Fax Mode

Fax

Fax Server

Disabled

Select a fax mode.

Note: Depending on your printer model, the factory default

setting may vary.

Fax Setup

General Fax settings

Menu item Description

Fax Name Identify your fax machine.

Fax Number Identify your fax number.

Fax ID

Fax Name

Fax Number*

Notify fax recipients of your fax name or fax number.

Memory Use

All receive

Mostly receive

Equal*

Mostly send

All send

Set the amount of internal printer memory allocated for faxing.

Note: This menu item prevents memory buer conditions and failed faxes.

Cancel Faxes

Allow*

Don't Allow

Cancel outgoing faxes before they are transmitted, or cancel incoming faxes

before they ﬁnish printing.

Fax Number Masking

O*

From Left

From Right

Specify the format for masking an outgoing fax number.

Digits to Mask

0–58 (0*)

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.

Enable Line Connected

Detection

On*

O

Determine whether a telephone line is connected to the printer.

Note: Detection takes place when turning on the printer and before each call.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 111

Menu item Description

Optimize Fax Compatibility Conﬁgure the printer fax functionality for optimal compatibility with other fax

machines.

Fax Transport

T.38

Analog

G.711

etherFAX

Set the fax transport method.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only if an etherFAX or Fax over IP (FoIP) license

bundle is installed in the printer.

•Depending on your printer model, the factory default settings may vary.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

HTTPS Fax Settings

Note: This menu appears only if Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.

Menu item Description

HTTPS service URL Specify the etherFAX service URL.

HTTPS Proxy Specify a proxy server URL.

HTTPS Proxy User Specify the user name and password for the proxy server.

HTTPS Proxy Password

Fax Send Encryption

Disabled

Enabled*

Required

Enable encryption for outgoing fax messages.

Fax Receive Encryption

Disabled

Enabled*

Required

Enable encryption for incoming fax messages.

HTTPS Fax Status Show the etherFAX communication status.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Send Settings

Menu item Description

Resolution

Standard*

Fine

Super Fine

Ultra Fine

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Note: A higher resolution increases fax transmission time and requires more

memory.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes] (Mixed

Sizes*)

Specify the size of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 112

Menu item Description

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Sides

O*

Short Edge

Long Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides

of the document.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Content Type

Text*

Text/Photo

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Behind a PABX

O*

Set the printer to dial a fax number without waiting to recognize the dial tone.

Note: Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) is a telephone network that

allows a single access number to oer multiple lines to outside callers.

Dial Mode

Tone*

Pulse

Specify the dial mode for incoming or outgoing faxes.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan ‑ Red

-4 to 4 (0*)

Magenta ‑ Green

-4 to 4 (0*)

Ye l l o w ‑ Blue

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the color intensity during scanning.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 113

Menu item Description

Color Dropout

Color Dropout (None*)

Default Red Threshold (128*)

Default Green Threshold

(128*)

Default Blue Threshold (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Contrast

Best for Content*

Set the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of the scanned image.

Temperatur e

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 114

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Enable Color Fax Scans

O by Default*

On by Default

Never Use

Always Use

Enable color scans for fax.

Automatic Redial

0–9 (5*)

Adjust the number of redial attempts based on the activity levels of recipient fax

machines.

Redial Frequency

1–200 minutes (3*)

Increase the time between redial attempts to increase the chance of sending

fax successfully.

Enable ECM

On*

O

Activate Error Correction Mode (ECM) for fax jobs.

Note: ECM detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process caused

by telephone line noise and poor signal strength.

Enable Fax Scans

On*

O

Fax documents that are scanned at the printer.

Driver to Fax

On*

O

Allow the print driver to send fax.

Allow Save as Shortcut

On*

O

Save fax numbers as shortcuts on the printer.

Max Speed

33600*

14400

9600

4800

2400

Set the maximum speed for sending fax.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 115

Menu item Description

Auto Convert Color Faxes to

Mono Faxes

On*

O

Convert all outgoing color faxes to black and white.

Conﬁrm Fax Number

O*

Ask the user to conﬁrm the fax number.

Dial Preﬁx Set a dialing preﬁx.

Dialing Preﬁx Rules Establish a dialing preﬁx rule.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings

Menu item Description

Fax Job Waiting

None*

Toner

Toner and Supplies

Remove fax jobs that request speciﬁc unavailable resources from the print

queue.

Rings to Answer

1–25 (3*)

Set the number of rings for incoming fax.

Auto Reduction

On*

O

Scale incoming fax to ﬁt on the page.

Paper Source

Tray [X]

Auto*

Set the paper source for printing incoming fax.

Sides

O*

Print on both sides of the paper.

Separator Sheets

None*

Before Job

After Job

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [X] (1*)

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Output Bin

Standard Bin

Specify the output bin for received faxes.

Fax Footer

O*

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received

fax.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 116

Menu item Description

Fax Footer Time Stamp

Receive*

Print the time stamp at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Staple

O*

1 staple

2 staples

Staple the printed fax document.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬁnisher is installed.

Holding Faxes

Held Fax Mode

O*

Always On

Manual

Scheduled

Hold received faxes from printing until they are released.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Enable Fax Receive

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax.

Enable Color Fax Receive

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax in color.

Enable Caller ID

O*

Show the number that is sending the incoming fax.

Block No Name Fax

O*

Block incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID speciﬁed.

Banned Fax List

Add Banned Fax

Specify the phone numbers that you want to block.

Answer On

All Rings*

Single Ring Only

Double Ring Only

Triple Ring Only

Single or Double Rings Only

Single or Triple Rings Only

Double or Triple Rings Only

Set a distinctive ring pattern for incoming fax.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 117

Menu item Description

Auto Answer

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax automatically.

Fax Forwarding

Print*

Print and Forward

Forward

Specify whether to forward received fax.

Forward To

Destination 1

Destination 2

Specify where to forward received fax.

Note: This menu item appears only when Fax Forwarding is set to Print and

Forward or Forward.

Max Speed

33600*

14400

9600

4800

2400

Set the maximum speed for transmitting fax.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 118

Fax Cover Page

Menu item Description

Fax Cover Page

O by Default*

On by Default

Never Use

Always Use

Conﬁgure the settings for the fax cover page.

Include To ﬁeld

O*

Include From ﬁeld

O*

From

Include Message Field

O*

Message:

Include Logo

O*

Include Footer [x]

O*

Footer [x]

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Log settings

Menu item Description

Transmission Log Frequency

Always*

Never

Only for Error

Specify how often the printer creates a transmission log.

Transmission Log Action

O

On*

E‑mail

O*

Print or e‑mail a log for successful fax transmission or transmission error.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 119

Menu item Description

Receive Error Log

Print Never*

Print on Error

Print a log for fax‑receive failures.

Auto Print Logs

On*

O

Print all fax activity.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Specify the paper source for printing logs.

Logs Display

Remote Fax Name*

Dialed Number

Identify the sender by remote fax name or fax number.

Enable Job Log

On*

O

View a summary of all fax jobs.

Enable Call Log

On*

O

View a summary of fax dialing history.

Log Output Bin

Standard Bin*

Bin [x]

Specify the output bin for printed logs.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Speaker settings

Menu item Description

Speaker Mode

Always O*

Always On

On until Connected

Set the fax speaker mode.

Speaker Volume

Low*

High

Adjust the fax speaker volume.

Ringer Volume

O*

Enable the ringer volume.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 120

Fax Server Setup

General Fax Settings

Menu item Description

To Fo rma t Specify a fax recipient.

Note: If you want to use the fax number, then type the number sign (#) before

a number.

Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.

Subject Specify the fax subject and message.

Message

Enable analog receive

O*

Set the printer to receive analog faxes.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Server E‑mail Settings

Menu item Description

Use E‑mail SMTP Server

On*

O

Use the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings for e‑mail in receiving

and sending faxes.

Note: When set to On, all other settings of theFax Server E‑mail Settings

menu are not shown.

Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or backup SMTP

server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP server.

SMTP Timeout

5–30 (30*)

Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does not respond.

Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.

Use SSL/TLS

Disabled*

Negotiate

Required

Specify whether to send fax using an encrypted link.

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate

O

On*

Specify a trusted certiﬁcate when accessing the SMTP server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 121

Menu item Description

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required*

NTLM

CRAM‑MD5

Digest‑MD5

Kerberos 5

Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.

Device‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.

User‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and

Password

Use Session E‑mail address

and Password

Prompt user

Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.

Use Active Directory Device

Credentials

O*

Enable user credentials and group destinations to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Password

Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.

NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.

Disable "SMTP server not set

up" error

O*

Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Server Scan Settings

Menu item Description

Image Format

TIFF (.tif)

PDF (.pdf)*

XPS (.xps)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 122

Menu item Description

Content Type

Text*

Text/Photo

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Fax Resolution

Standard*

Fine

Super Fine

Ultra Fine

Set the fax resolution.

Sides

O*

Short Edge

Long Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides

of the document.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Set the darkness of the output.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

•Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international

factory default setting.

•This setting may vary depending on your printer model.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

O

On*

Choose between single‑ and multiple‑page TIFF ﬁles.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 123

E-mail

E‑mail Setup

Menu item Description

Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server for

sending e-mail.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or

backup SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP

server.

SMTP Timeout

5–30 seconds (30*)

Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does

not respond.

Reply Address Specify a reply address in the e‑mail.

Always use SMTP default Reply Address

O*

Always use the default reply address in the SMTP server.

Use SSL/TLS

Disabled*

Negotiate

Required

Specify whether to send e‑mail using an encrypted link.

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate

O

On*

Require a trusted certiﬁcate when accessing the SMTP server.

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required*

NTLM

CRAM‑MD5

Digest‑MD5

Kerberos 5

Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.

Device‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 124

Menu item Description

User‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and Password

Use Session E‑mail address and Password

Prompt user

Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.

Use Active Directory Device Credentials

O*

Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.

Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Password

Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.

NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.

Disable “SMTP server not set up” error

O*

Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

E‑mail Defaults

Menu item Description

Subject: Specify the e‑mail subject and message.

Message:

File Name Specify the ﬁlename for the scanned document.

Format

JPEG (.jpg)

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

XPS (.xps)

TXT (.txt)

RTF (.rtf)

DOCX (.docx)

CSV (.csv)

Specify the ﬁle format of the scanned document.

Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR

solution.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 125

Menu item Description

PDF Settings

PDF Version (1.5*)

Archival Version (A‑1a*)

Highly Compressed (O*)

Secure (O*)

Archival (PDF/A) (O*)

Conﬁgure the PDF settings of the scanned document.

Notes:

•Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is

set to 1.4.

•Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Content Type

Text

Text/Photo*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Set the printer to capture ﬁle content in color or in mono.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of the original document.

Original Size

Mixed Sizes*

Set the paper size of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 126

Menu item Description

Sides

O*

Short Edge

Long Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides of the

document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan (0*)

Magenta (0*)

Ye l lo w (0 *)

Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout

setting for that color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

E‑mail Bit Depth

1 bit*

8 bit

Minimum Scan Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi*

Conﬁgure the auto color detection setting.

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 127

Menu item Description

Contrast

Best for content*

0–5

Specify the contrast for the scanned image.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level ‑4 to 4 (0*)

Remove the background color or image noise from the original

document.

Notes:

•Content-based removes the background color from the original

document.

•Fixed removes image noise from a photo.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Scan the original document from edge to edge.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.

Temperatur e

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal (Do Not Remove*)

Blank Page Sensitivity (5*)

Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original

document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Max E‑mail Size

0–65535 (0*)

Set the allowable ﬁle size for each e‑mail.

Size Error Message Specify an error message that the printer sends when an e‑mail exceeds

its allowable ﬁle size.

Note: You can type up to 1024 characters.

Limit Destinations Limit sending of e‑mail only to the speciﬁed list of domain name.

Note: Use a comma to separate each domain.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 128

Menu item Description

Send Me a Copy

Never appears*

On by Default

O by Default

Always On

Send a copy of the e‑mail to yourself.

Allow self e‑mails only

O*

Set the printer to send e‑mails to yourself only.

Use cc:/bcc:

O*

Enable carbon copy and blind carbon copy in e‑mail.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

O

On*

Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF ﬁle.

TIFF Compression

JPEG

LZW*

Specify the compression type for TIFF ﬁles.

Text D efa ult

5–95 (75*)

Set the text quality in the content being scanned.

Text/ Ph oto Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the text and photo quality in the content being scanned.

Photo Default

5–95 (50*)

Set the photo quality of the content being scanned.

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are

scanned from the ADF.

Transmission Log

Print log*

Do Not Print Log

Print Only For Error

Print a transmission log for e‑mail scans.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing e‑mail logs.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Set the printer to scan the ﬁrst set of original documents using the

speciﬁed settings, and then next set with the same or dierent settings.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show a scan preview of the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 129

Menu item Description

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save an e‑mail address as a shortcut.

E‑mail Images Sent As

Attachment*

Web Link

Specify how to send the images that are included in the e‑mail.

Reset E-mail Information After Sending

O

On*

Reset the To, Subject, Message, and Filename ﬁelds to their default

values after sending an e‑mail.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Web Link Setup

Menu item Description

Server Specify the credentials of the server that is hosting the images that are included

in the e-mail.

Password

Path

File Name

Web Link

FTP

FTP Defaults

Menu item Description

Format

JPEG (.jpg)

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

XPS (.xps)

TXT (.txt)

RTF (.rtf)

DOCX (.docx)

CSV (.csv)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 130

Menu item Description

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR

solution.

PDF Settings

PDF Version (1.5*)

Archival Version (A‑1a*)

Highly Compressed (O*)

Secure (O*)

Archival (PDF/A) (O*)

Conﬁgure the PDF settings for the scanned image.

Notes:

•Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is

set to 1.4.

•Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Content Type

Text

Text/Photo*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Set the printer to capture ﬁle content in color or in mono.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 131

Menu item Description

Original Size

Mixed Sizes*

Set the paper size of the original document.

Sides

O*

Long Edge

Short Edge

Specify the orientation when scanning on both sides of the document.

File Name Specify the ﬁle name of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan (0*)

Magenta (0*)

Ye l lo w (0 *)

Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.

Color Dropout

None*

Red*

Green*

Blue*

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for that

color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

FTP Bit Depth

1 bit*

8 bit

Minimum Scan Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi*

Conﬁgure the auto color detection setting.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 132

Menu item Description

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.

Contrast

Best for content*

Specify the contrast for the scanned image.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level -4 to 4 (0*)

Remove the background color or image noise from the original document.

Notes:

•Content-based removes the background color from the original document .

•Fixed removes image noise from a photo.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.

Temperatur e

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal

Do Not Remove*

Remove

Blank Page Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 133

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Text D efa ult

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text on the scanned image.

Text/ Ph oto Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text and photo on the scanned image.

Photo Default

5–95 (50*)

Set the quality of photo on the scanned image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

On*

O

Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF ﬁle.

TIFF Compression

LZW*

JPEG

Specify the compression type for TIFF ﬁles.

Transmission Log

Print Log*

Do Not Print Log

Print Only For Error

Print a transmission log for FTP scans.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing FTP logs.

Log Output Bin

Standard Bin*

Bin [x]

Specify the output bin for printed FTP logs.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save an FTP address as a shortcut.

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned

from the ADF.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 134

USB Drive

Flash Drive Scan

Menu item Description

Format

JPEG (.jpg)

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

XPS (.xps)

TXT (.txt)

RTF (.rtf)

DOCX (.docx)

CSV (.csv)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR

solution.

PDF Settings

PDF Version (1.5*)

Archival Version (A‑1a*)

Highly Compressed (O*)

Secure (O*)

Archival (PDF/A) (O*)

Conﬁgure the PDF settings of the scanned image.

Notes:

•Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is

set to 1.4.

•Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Content Type

Text

Text/Photo*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 135

Menu item Description

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Set the printer to capture ﬁle content in color or in mono.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of the original document.

Original Size

Mixed Sizes*

Set the paper size of the original document.

Sides

O*

Long edge

Short edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides of the

document.

File Name Specify the ﬁle name of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan (0*)

Magenta (0*)

Ye l lo w (0 *)

Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 136

Menu item Description

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for that

color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Scan Bit Depth

1 bit*

8 bit

Minimum Scan Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi*

Conﬁgure the auto color detection setting.

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.

Contrast

Best for content*

0–5

Specify the contrast for the scanned image.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level (0*)

Remove the background color or image noise from the original document.

Notes:

•Content-based removes the background color from the original document.

•Fixed removes image noise from a photo.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 137

Menu item Description

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Scan the original document from edge to edge.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.

Temperatur e

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal

Do Not Remove*

Remove

Blank Page Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Text D efa ult

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text on the scanned image.

Text/ Ph oto Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text and photo on the scanned image.

Photo Default

5–95 (50*)

Set the quality of a photo on the scanned image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

O

On*

Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF ﬁle.

TIFF Compression

LZW*

JPEG

Specify the compression type for TIFF ﬁles.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 138

Menu item Description

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned

from the ADF.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Flash Drive Print

Menu item Description

Number of Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Set the number of copies.

Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Set the paper source for the print job.

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)*

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence, particularly when printing

multiple copies of the job.

Sides

1‑Sided*

2‑Sided

Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper.

Staple

O*

1 staple, top left corner

2 staples, left

1 staple, top right corner

2 staples, top

1 staple, bottom left corner

2 staples, bottom

1 staple, bottom right corner

2 staples, right

Specify the staple position for all print jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

Hole Punch

O*

2 holes

3 holes

Set the punch mode for all print jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 139

Menu item Description

Oset Pages

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.

Notes:

•Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On

[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to O [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed pages

are oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.

•Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job

regardless of the number of copies printed.

•This menu item appears only when a staple ﬁnisher is installed.

Flip Style

Long Edge*

Short Edge

Determine which side of the paper is bound when performing two‑sided printing.

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Pages per Side Ordering

Horizontal*

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Pages per Side menu.

Pages per Side Orientation

Auto*

Landscape

Portrait

Specify the orientation of multiple page images when using Pages per Side menu.

Pages per Side Border

None*

Solid

Print a border around each page image when using Pages per Side menu.

Separator Sheets

O*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 140

Menu item Description

Blank Pages

Do Not Print*

Print blank pages in a print job.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Network/Ports

Network Overview

Menu item Description

Active Adapter

Auto*

Standard Network

Wireless

Specify the type of the network connection.

Note: Wireless is available only in printers connected to a wireless network.

Network Status Show the connectivity status of the printer network.

Display Network Status on

Printer

O

On*

Show the network status on the display.

Speed, Duplex Show the speed of the currently active network card.

IPv4 Show the IPv4 address.

All IPv6 Addresses Show all IPv6 addresses.

Reset Print Server Reset all active network connections to the printer.

Note: This setting removes all network conﬁguration settings.

Network Job Timeout

O

On* (90 seconds)

Set the time before the printer cancels a network print job.

Banner Page

O*

Print a banner page.

Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers that are behind a port blocking ﬁrewall.

Enable Network Connections

O

On*

Enable the printer to connect to a network.

Enable LLDP

O*

Enable Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) in the printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 141

Wireless

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a Wi‑Fi network or printers that have a wireless

network adapter.

Menu item Description

Setup Using Mobile App Conﬁgure the Wi‑Fi connection using Lexmark Mobile Assistant.

Setup On Printer Panel

Choose Network

Add Wi‑Fi Network

Network Name

Network Mode

Infrastructure

Wireless Security Mode

Disabled*

WEP

WPA2/WPA - Personal

WPA2 - Personal

802.1x - RADIUS

Conﬁgure the Wi‑Fi connection using the control panel.

Note: 802.1x - RADIUS can be conﬁgured only from the Embedded

Web Server.

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

WPS Auto Detect

O

On*

Start Push Button Method

Start PIN Method

Establish a Wi‑Fi network and enable network security.

Notes:

•WPS Auto Detect appears only when the Wireless Security

Mode is set to WEP.

•Start Push-Button Method connects the printer to a Wi‑Fi

network when buttons on both the printer and the access point

(wireless router) are pressed within a given time.

•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a Wi‑Fi network when

a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the

access point.

Network Mode

BSS Type

Infrastructure*

Specify the network mode.

Compatibility

802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz)*

802.11a/b/g/n/ac (2.4GHz/5GHz)

802.11a/n/ac (5GHz)

Specify the standard for the Wi‑Fi network.

Note: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (2.4GHz/5GHz) and 802.11a/n/ac (5GHz) only

appear when a Wi‑Fi option is installed.

Wireless Security Mode

Disabled*

WEP

WPA2/WPA-Personal

WPA2-Personal

802.1x - RADIUS

Set the security mode for connecting the printer to Wi‑Fi devices.

Note: 802.1x - RADIUS can be conﬁgured only from the Embedded

Web Server.

Understanding the printer menus 142

Menu item Description

WEP Authentication Mode

Auto*

Open

Shared

Set the type of Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP) for the printer.

Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security

Mode is set to WEP.

Set WEP Key Specify a WEP password for secure Wi‑Fi connection.

WPA2/WPA Personal

AES

Enable Wi‑Fi security through Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).

Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security

Mode is set to WPA2/WPA-Personal.

Set Pre‑Shared Key Set the password for secure Wi‑Fi connection.

WPA2-Personal

AES

Enable Wi‑Fi security through WPA2.

Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security

Mode is set to WPA2-Personal.

802.1x Encryption Mode

WPA+

WPA2*

Enable Wi‑Fi security through 802.1x standard.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security Mode

is set to 802.1x - RADIUS.

•802.1x - RADIUS can be conﬁgured only from the Embedded

Web Server.

IPv4

Enable DHCP

On*

O

Set Static IP Address

IP Address

Netmask

Gateway

Enable and conﬁgure IPv4 settings in the printer.

IPv6

Enable IPv6

On*

O

Enable DHCPv6

O*

Stateless Address Autoconﬁguration

On*

O

DNS Server Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Router

Address Preﬁx

All IPv6 Addresses

All IPv6 Router Addresses

Enable and conﬁgure IPv6 settings in the printer.

Understanding the printer menus 143

Menu item Description

Network Address

UAA

LAA

View the network addresses.

PCL SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: If PCL SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PS emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: If PS SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

Job Buering

O*

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

•O ﬁlters print jobs using the standard protocol.

Wi‑Fi Direct

Menu item Description

Enable Wi‑Fi Direct

O*

Set the printer to connect directly to Wi-Fi devices.

Wi‑Fi Direct Name Specify the name of the Wi‑Fi Direct network.

Wi‑Fi Direct Password Set the password to authenticate and validate users on a Wi‑Fi connection.

Show Password on Setup Page

O

On*

Show the Wi‑Fi Direct Password on the Network Setup Page.

Preferred Channel Number

1–11

Auto*

Set the preferred channel of the Wi‑Fi network.

Group Owner IP Address Specify the IP address of the group owner.

Auto‑Accept Push Button

Requests

O*

Accept requests to connect to the network automatically.

Note: Accepting clients automatically is not secured.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 144

Ethernet

Menu item Description

Network Speed Show the speed of the active network adapter.

IPv4

Enable DHCP (On*)

Set Static IP Address

Conﬁgure the IPv4 settings.

IPv6

Enable IPv6 (On*)

Enable DHCPv6 (O*)

Stateless Address Autoconﬁguration (On*)

DNS Server Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Router

Address Preﬁx (64*)

All IPv6 Addresses

All IPv6 Router Addresses

Conﬁgure the IPv6 settings.

Network Address

UAA

LAA

Specify the network address.

PCL SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PostScript emulation when

a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

Job Buering

O*

Temporarily store jobs on the hard disk before printing.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•Auto processes print jobs from computers using either

Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

•O ﬁlters PostScript print jobs using the standard protocol.

Energy Ecient Ethernet

O

Auto*

Reduce power consumption when the printer does not receive data

from the Ethernet network.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 145

TCP/IP

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.

Domain Name Set the domain name.

Allow DHCP/BOOTP to update

NTP server

On*

O

Allow the DHCP and BOOTP clients to update the NTP settings of the printer.

Zero Conﬁguration Name Specify a service name for the zero conﬁguration network.

Enable Auto IP

O*

Assign an IP address automatically.

DNS Server Address Specify the current Domain Name System (DNS) server address.

Backup DNS Address Specify the backup DNS server addresses.

Backup DNS Address 2

Backup DNS Address 3

Domain Search Order Specify a list of domain names to locate the printer and its resources that reside

in dierent domains on the network.

Enable DDNS

O*

Update the Dynamic DNS settings.

DDNS TTL Specify the current DDNS settings.

Default TTL

DDNS Refresh Time

Enable mDNS

O

On*

Update the multicast DNS settings.

WINS Server Address Specify a server address for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS).

Enable BOOTP

O*

Allow the BOOTP to assign a printer IP address.

Restricted Server List Specify the IP addresses that are allowed to communicate with the printer over

TCP/IP.

Notes:

•Use a comma to separate each IP address.

•You can add up to 50 IP addresses.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 146

Menu item Description

Restricted Server List Options

Block All Ports*

Block Printing Only

Block Printing and HTTP Only

Specify the access option for IP addresses that are not in the list.

MTU

256–1500 Ethernet (1500*)

Specify a maximum transmission unit (MTU) parameter for the TCP connections.

Raw Print Port

1–65535 (9100*)

Specify a raw port number for printers connected on a network.

Outbound Trac Maximum

Speed

O*

Set the maximum transfer rate of the printer.

Note: When enabled, the option for this setting is 100–1000000

Kilobits/second.

Enable TLSv1.0

O

On*

Enable the TLSv1.0 protocol.

Enable TLSv1.1

O

On*

Enable the TLSv1.1 protocol.

SSL Cipher List Specify the cipher algorithms to use for the SSL or the TLS connections.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

SNMP

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

SNMP Versions 1 and 2c

Enabled

O

On*

Allow SNMP Set

O

On*

Enable PPM MIB

O

On*

SNMP Community

Conﬁgure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1

and 2c to install print drivers and applications.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 147

Menu item Description

SNMP Version 3

Enabled

O

On*

Context Name

Set Read/Write Credentials

User Name

Authentication Password

Privacy Password

Set Read‑only Credentials

User Name

Authentication Password

Privacy Password

Authentication Hash

MD5

SHA1*

Minimum Authentication Level

No Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication, Privacy*

Privacy Algorithm

DES

AES‑128*

Conﬁgure SNMP version 3 to install and update the printer security.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

IPSec

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Enable IPSec

O

On*

Enable Internet Protocol Security (IPSec).

Base Conﬁguration

Default*

Compatibility

Secure

Set the IPSec base conﬁguration.

DH (Die‑Hellman) Group Proposal

modp2048 (14)*

modp3072 (15)

modp4096 (16)

modp6144 (17)

Set the IPSec base conﬁguration.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Compatibility.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 148

Menu item Description

Proposed Encryption Method

3DES

AES*

Set the encryption method.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Compatibility.

Proposed Authentication Method

SHA1

SHA256*

SHA512

Set the authentication method.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Compatibility.

IKE SA Lifetime (Hours)

24*

Specify the IKE SA expiry period.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Secure.

IPSec SA Lifetime (Hours)

Specify the IPSec SA expiry period.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Secure.

IPSec Device Certiﬁcate Specify an IPSec certiﬁcate.

Pre‑Shared Key Authenticated

Connections

Host [x]

Conﬁgure the authenticated connections of the printer.

Certiﬁcate Authenticated Connections

Host [x] Address[/subnet]

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

802.1x

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Active

O*

Let the printer join networks that require authentication before

allowing access.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

LPD Conﬁguration

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Understanding the printer menus 149

Menu item Description

LPD Timeout

0–65535 seconds (90*)

Set the time‑out value to stop the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) server

from waiting indeﬁnitely for hung or invalid print jobs.

LPD Banner Page

O*

Print a banner page for all LPD print jobs.

Note: A banner page is the ﬁrst page of a print job used as a

separator of print jobs and to identify the originator of the print job

request.

LPD Trailer Page

O*

Print a trailer page for all LPD print jobs.

Note: A trailer page is the last page of a print job.

LPD Carriage Return Conversion

O*

Enable carriage return conversion.

Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to

move the position of the cursor to the ﬁrst position on the same

line.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

HTTP/FTP Settings

Menu item Description

Enable HTTP Server

O

On*

Access the Embedded Web Server to monitor and manage the printer.

Enable HTTPS

O

On*

Enable Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) to encrypt data transferring

to and from the print server.

Force HTTPS Connections

O*

Force the printer to use HTTPS connections.

Enable FTP/TFTP

O

On*

Send ﬁles using FTP/TFTP.

Local Domains Specify domain names for HTTP and FTP servers.

HTTP Proxy IP Address Conﬁgure the HTTP and FTP server settings.

FTP Proxy IP Address

HTTP Default IP Port

HTTPS Device Certiﬁcate

FTP Default IP Port

Timeout for HTTP/FTP

Requests

1–299 (30*)

Specify the amount of time before the server connection stops.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 150

Menu item Description

Retries for HTTP/FTP Requests

1–299 (3*)

Set the number of retries to connect to the HTTP/FTP server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

ThinPrint

Menu item Description

Enable ThinPrint

O*

Print using ThinPrint.

Port Number

4000–4999 (4000*)

Set the port number for the ThinPrint server.

Bandwidth (bits/sec)

100–1000000 (0*)

Set the speed to transmit data in a ThinPrint environment.

Packet Size (kbytes)

0–64000 (0*)

Set the packet size for data transmission.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

USB

Menu item Description

PCL SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires

it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the

default printer language speciﬁed in the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch to PostScript emulation when a print job received through a USB port

requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the

default printer language speciﬁed in the Setup menu.

Job Buering

O*

Temporarily store jobs on the hard disk before printing.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•Auto processes print jobs from computers using either Windows or Macintosh operating

systems.

•O ﬁlters PostScript print jobs using the standard protocol.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 151

Menu item Description

Enable USB Port

O

On*

Enable the front USB drive port.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Restrict external network access

Menu item Description

Restrict external network

access

O*

Restrict access to network sites.

External network address Specify the network addresses with restricted access.

E‑mail address for notiﬁcation Specify an e‑mail address to send a notiﬁcation of logged events.

Ping frequency

1–300 (10*)

Specify the network query interval in seconds.

Subject Specify the subject and message of the notiﬁcation e‑mail.

Message

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 152

Security

Manage Permissions

Menu item Description

Function Access

Access Address Book in Apps

Modify Address Book

Manage Shortcuts

Create Proﬁles

Manage Bookmarks

Flash Drive Print

Flash Drive Scan

Copy Function

Color Dropout

E‑mail Function

Fax Function

FTP Function

Release Held Faxes

Held Jobs Access

User Proﬁles

Cancel Jobs at the Device

Change Language

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

Initiate Scans Remotely

B/W Print

Network Folder ‑ Scan

Control access to the printer functions.

Administrative Menus

Security Menu

Network/Ports Menu

Paper Menu

Reports Menu

Function Conﬁguration Menus

Supplies Menu

Option Card Menu

SE Menu

Device Menu

Control access to the printer menu settings.

Understanding the printer menus 153

Menu item Description

Device Management

Remote Management

Firmware Updates

Apps Conﬁguration

Operator Panel Lock

Import/Export All Settings

Out of Service Erase

Embedded Web Server Access

Control access to the printer management options.

Apps

New Apps

Slideshow

Change Wallpaper

Screen Saver

Card Copy

Scan Center

Scan Center Custom 1

Scan Center Custom 2

Scan Center Custom 3

Scan Center Custom 4

Scan Center Custom 5

Scan Center Custom 6

Scan Center Custom 7

Scan Center Custom 8

Scan Center Custom 9

Scan Center Custom 10

Forms and Favorites

Control access to printer applications.

Local Accounts

Menu item Description

Manage Groups/Permissions Show a list of all saved groups in the printer.

Add User

User Name/Password

User Name

Password

Create local accounts and specify their access to the printer functions,

administrative menus, printer management options, and applications.

Schedule USB Devices

Menu item Description

Schedules

Add New Schedule

Schedule access to the front USB port.

Understanding the printer menus 154

Security Audit Log

Menu item Description

Enable Audit

O*

Record the events in the secure audit log and remote syslog.

Enable Remote Syslog

O*

Send audit logs to a remote server.

Remote Syslog Server Specify the remote syslog server.

Remote Syslog Port

1–65535 (514*)

Specify the remote syslog port.

Remote Syslog Method

Normal UDP*

Stunnel

Specify a syslog method to transmit logged events to a remote server.

Remote Syslog Facility

0 ‑ Kernel Messages

1 ‑ User‑Level Messages

2 ‑ Mail System

3 ‑ System Daemons

4 ‑ Security/Authorization

Messages*

5 ‑ Messages Generated

Internally by Syslogs

6 ‑ Line Printer Subsystem

7 ‑ Network News Subsystem

8 ‑ UUCP Subsystem

9 ‑ Clock Daemon

10 ‑ Security/Authorization

Messages

11 ‑ FTP Daemon

12 ‑ NTP Subsystem

13 ‑ Log Audit

14 ‑ Log Alert

15 ‑ Clock Daemon

16 ‑ Local Use 0 (local0)

17‑ Local Use 1 (local1)

18 ‑ Local Use 2 (local2)

19 ‑ Local Use 3 (local3)

20 ‑ Local Use 4 (local4)

21 ‑ Local Use 5 (local5)

22 ‑ Local Use 6 (local6)

23 ‑ Local Use 7 (local7)

Specify a facility code that the printer uses when sending log events to a remote

server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 155

Menu item Description

Severity of Events to Log

0 ‑ Emergency

1 ‑ Alert

2 ‑ Critical

3 ‑ Error

4 ‑ Warning*

5 ‑ Notice

6 ‑ Informational

7 ‑ Debug

Specify the priority level cuto for logging messages and events.

Remote Syslog Non‑Logged

Events

O*

Send all events, regardless of severity level, to the remote server.

Admin’s E‑mail Address Send e‑mail notiﬁcation of logged events to the administrator.

E‑mail Log Cleared Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when a log entry is deleted.

E‑mail Log Wrapped Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when the log becomes full and

begins to overwrite the oldest entries.

Log Full Behavior

Wrap Over Older Entries*

E‑mail Log Then Delete All

Entries

Resolve log storage issues when the log ﬁlls its allotted memory.

E‑mail % Full Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when the log ﬁlls its allotted

memory.

% Full Alert Level

1–99 (90*)

E‑mail Log Exported Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when a log is exported.

E‑mail Log Settings Changed

Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when Enable Audit is set.

Log Line Endings

LF (\n)*

CR (\r)

CRLF (\r\n)

Specify how the log ﬁle terminates the end of each line.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 156

Menu item Description

Digitally Sign Exports

O*

Add a digital signature to each exported log ﬁle.

Clear Log Delete all audit logs.

Export Log

Syslog (RFC 5424)

Syslog (RFC 3164)

CSV

Export a security log to a ﬂash drive.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Description

1–10 (3*)

Specify the number of failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.

Failure time frame

1–60 minutes (5*)

Specify the time frame between failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.

Lockout time

1–60 minutes (5*)

Specify the lockout duration.

Web Login Timeout

1–120 minutes (10*)

Specify the delay for a remote login before the user is logged o automatically.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Conﬁdential Print Setup

Menu item Description

Max Invalid PIN

2–10

Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Notes:

•A value of zero turns o this setting.

•When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are

deleted.

Conﬁdential Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time for conﬁdential print jobs.

Notes:

•If this menu item is changed while conﬁdential print jobs reside in the printer

memory or hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not

change to the new default value.

•If the printer is turned o, then all conﬁdential jobs held in the printer memory

are deleted.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 157

Menu item Description

Repeat Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time for a print job that you want to repeat.

Verify Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy for the user to examine its quality,

before printing the remaining copies.

Reserve Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs for printing later.

Require All Jobs to be Held

O*

Set the printer to hold all print jobs.

Keep duplicate documents

O*

Set the printer to print other documents with the same ﬁle name without overwriting

any of the print jobs.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Disk Encryption

Note: This menu appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Menu item Description

Status

Enabled

Disabled

Enable disk encryption.

Start encryption

Understanding the printer menus 158

Erase Temporary Data Files

Menu item Description

Stored in onboard memory

O*

Delete all ﬁles stored on the printer memory.

Stored on hard disk

1 Pass Erase*

3 Pass Erase

7 Pass Erase

Delete all ﬁles stored on the printer hard disk.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Solutions LDAP Settings

Menu item Description

Follow LDAP Referrals

O*

Search the dierent servers in the domain for the logged-in user account.

LDAP Certiﬁcate Veriﬁcation

Ye s

No*

Enable veriﬁcation of LDAP certiﬁcates.

Miscellaneous

Menu item Description

Protected Features

Show*

Hide

Show all the features that Function Access Control (FAC) protects regardless

of the security permission that the user has.

Note: Hide displays only FAC‑protected features that the user has access.

Print Permission

O*

Let the user log in before printing.

Default Print Permission Login

User Name/Password*

User Name

Set the default login for Print Permission.

Security Reset Jumper

Enable “Guest” access*

No Eect

Specify user access to the printer.

Notes:

•The jumper is located beside a lock icon on the controller board.

•Enable “Guest” access provides anyone access to all aspects of the

printer.

•No Eect may make access to the printer impossible when the required

security information is unavailable.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 159

Menu item Description

Minimum Password Length

0–32

Specify the password length.

Enable Password/PIN Reveal Show the password or personal identiﬁcation number.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Menu item Description

Menu Settings Page Print a report that contains the printer menus.

Device

Menu item Description

Device Information Print a report that contains information about the printer.

Device Statistics Print a report about printer usage and supply status.

Proﬁle List Print a list of proﬁles that are stored in the printer.

Asset Report Print a report that contains the printer serial number and model name.

Menu item Description

Print Fonts

PCL Fonts

PS Fonts

Print samples and information about the fonts that are available in each printer

language.

Print Demo

Demo Page

Print a page that shows the printer capabilities and supported solutions.

Print Directory Print the resources that are stored in the ﬂash drive or printer hard disk.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬂash drive or printer hard disk is

installed.

Understanding the printer menus 160

Shortcuts

Menu item Description

All Shortcuts Print a report that lists the shortcuts that are stored in the printer.

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Shortcuts

E‑mail Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Network Folder Shortcuts

Fax

Note: This menu appears only if Fax is conﬁgured, and Enable Job Log is set to On.

Menu item Description

Fax Job Log Print a report about the last 200 completed fax jobs.

Fax Call Log Print a report about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.

Network

Menu item Description

Network Setup Page Print a page that shows the conﬁgured network and wireless settings on the

printer.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected

to print servers.

Wi‑Fi Direct Connected Clients Print a page that shows the list of devices that are connected to the printer using

Wi‑Fi Direct.

Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Wi‑Fi Direct is set to On.

Help

Menu item Description

Print All Guides Prints all the guides

Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a

network

Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and conﬁguring the settings

E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and conﬁguring the settings

Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and conﬁguring the settings

FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and conﬁguring the settings

Information Guide Provides more information sources about the printer

Understanding the printer menus 161

Menu item Description

Media Guide Provides information about loading paper and specialty media

Mono Quality Guide Provides information about mono print quality settings

Moving Guide Provides information about moving, locating, or shipping the printer

Print Quality Guide Provides information about solving print quality issues

Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies

Troubleshooting

Menu item Description

Print Quality Test Pages Print sample pages to identify and correct print quality defects.

Cleaning the Scanner Print instructions on how to clean the scanner.

Printing the Menu Settings Page

From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Menu Settings Page.

Understanding the printer menus 162

Securing the printer

Locating the security slot

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop

computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.

Erasing printer memory

To erase volatile memory or buered data in your printer, turn o the printer.

To erase nonvolatile memory or individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and

embedded solutions, do the following:

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase.

2Select the Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory check box, and then touch ERASE.

3Select Start initial setup wizard or Leave printer oine, and then touch Next.

4Start the operation.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase.

2Select the Sanitize all information on hard disk check box, and then touch ERASE.

3Select a method to erase data.

4Start the operation.

Note: This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for

other tasks.

Securing the printer 163

Encrypting the printer hard disk

This process erases all contents in the hard disk. If necessary, back up important data from the printer before

starting the encryption.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Security > Disk Encryption > Start encryption.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Notes:

•To avoid loss of data, do not turn o the printer during the encryption process.

•This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for

other tasks.

•After encryption, the printer automatically restarts.

Restoring factory default settings

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Restore Factory Defaults.

2Tou ch Restore Settings > select the settings that you want to restore > RESTORE.

3Start the operation.

Statement of Volatility

Type of memory Description

Volatile memory The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM)

to buer temporarily user data during simple print and

copy jobs.

Non-volatile memory The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:

EEPROM and NAND (ﬂash memory). Both types are used

to store the operating system, printer settings, network

information, scanner and bookmark settings, and

embedded solutions.

Hard disk memory Some printers may have a hard disk drive installed. The

printer hard disk is designed for printer-speciﬁc

functionality. The hard disk lets the printer retain buered

user data from complex print jobs, form data, and font

data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•The printer is decommissioned.

•The printer hard disk is replaced.

•The printer is moved to a dierent department or location.

•The printer is serviced by someone from outside your organization.

•The printer is removed from your premises for service.

•The printer is sold to another organization.

Securing the printer 164

Disposing of a printer hard disk

•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic ﬁeld that erases stored data

•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable

•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: To guarantee that all data are completely erased, destroy physically each hard disk where data is

stored.

Securing the printer 165

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and

supplies, may cause damage to your printer.

Conﬁguring supply notiﬁcations

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations.

3From the Supplies menu, click Custom Supply Notiﬁcations.

4Select a notiﬁcation for each supply item.

5Apply the changes.

Setting up e‑mail alerts

Conﬁgure the printer to send e‑mail alerts when supplies are low, when paper must be changed or added, or

when there is a paper jam.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations > E‑mail Alert Setup, and then conﬁgure the settings.

Note: For more information on SMTP settings, contact your e‑mail provider.

3Click Setup E-mail Lists and Alerts, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Viewing reports

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports.

2Select the report that you want to view.

Maintaining the printer 166

Adjusting the speaker volume

Adjusting the default headphone volume

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Accessibility

2Adjust the headphone volume.

Note: The volume resets to the default value after the session is logged out or when the printer wakes

from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Conﬁguring the fax speaker settings

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Speaker Settings.

2Do the following:

•Set Speaker Mode to Always On.

•Set Speaker Volume to High.

•Enable Ringer Volume.

Networking

Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network

Make sure that Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network

Overview > Active Adapter.

Using the control panel

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup On Printer Panel > Choose

Network.

2Select a Wi‑Fi network, and then type the network password.

Note: For Wi‑Fi‑network‑ready printer models, a prompt for Wi‑Fi network setup appears during initial

setup.

Using Lexmark Mobile Assistant

1Depending on your mobile device, download the Lexmark Mobile Assistant application from either the

Google Play store or App Store online store.

2From the printer home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup Using Mobile App >

Printer ID.

3From your mobile device, launch the application, and then accept the Terms of Use.

Note: If necessary, grant permissions.

Maintaining the printer 167

4Tap Connect to Printer > Go to Wi‑Fi Settings.

5Connect your mobile device to the printer wireless network.

6Return to the application, and then tap Setup Wi-Fi Connection

7Select a Wi-Fi network, and then type the network password.

8Tap Done.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

(WPS)

Before you begin, make sure that:

•The access point (wireless router) is WPS‑certiﬁed or WPS‑compatible. For more information, see the

documentation that came with your access point.

•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer. For more information, see the instructions that came

with the adapter.

•Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview

> Active Adapter.

Using the Push Button method

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push

Button Method.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Using the personal identiﬁcation number (PIN) method

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN

Method.

2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.

3Open a web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•To know the IP address, see the documentation that came with your access point.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the changes.

Maintaining the printer 168

Conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct® is a Wi-Fi-based peer-to-peer technology that allows wireless devices to connect directly to a Wi-

Fi Direct‑enabled printer without using an access point (wireless router).

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

•Enable Wi‑Fi Direct—Enables the printer to broadcast its own Wi‑Fi Direct network.

•Wi‑Fi Direct Name—Assigns a name for the Wi‑Fi Direct network.

•Wi‑Fi Direct Password—Assigns the password for negotiating the wireless security when using the

peer‑to-peer connection.

•Show Password on Setup Page—Shows the password on the Network Setup Page.

•Auto-Accept Push Button Requests—Lets the printer accept connection requests automatically.

Note: Accepting push‑button requests automatically is not secured.

Note: To know the password of the Wi-Fi Direct network, print the Network Setup Page. From the home

screen, touch Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.

Connecting a mobile device to the printer

Before connecting your mobile device, make sure that Wi‑Fi Direct has been conﬁgured. For more information,

see “Conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct” on page 169.

Connecting using Wi‑Fi Direct

Note: These instructions apply only to Android mobile devices.

1From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.

2Enable Wi‑Fi, and then tap Wi‑Fi Direct.

3Select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.

4Conﬁrm the connection on the printer control panel.

Connecting using Wi‑Fi

1From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.

2Tap Wi‑Fi, and then select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct

name.

3Enter the Wi-Fi Direct password.

Connecting a computer to the printer

Before connecting your computer, make sure to do the following:

•Enable Wi‑Fi Direct in the printer. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct >

Enable Wi‑Fi Direct > On.

•Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct name. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct

> Wi-Fi Direct Name.

Maintaining the printer 169

•Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct password. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi

Direct > Wi-Fi Direct Password.

Note: You can also conﬁgure the Wi‑Fi Direct name and password.

For Windows users

1Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.

2Click Show Wi-Fi Direct printers, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.

3From the printer display, take note of the eight-digit PIN of the printer.

4Enter the PIN on the computer.

Note: If the print driver is not already installed, then Windows downloads the appropriate driver.

For Macintosh users

1Click the wireless icon, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct

name.

2Type the Wi‑Fi Direct password.

Note: Switch your computer back to its previous network after disconnecting from the Wi-Fi Direct

connection.

Deactivating the Wi‑Fi network

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter > Standard

Network.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Changing the printer port settings after installing an internal solutions port

Notes:

•If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the conﬁguration.

•If the computers are conﬁgured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change

the conﬁguration.

•If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously conﬁgured for an Ethernet

connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.

For Windows users

1Open the printers folder.

2From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.

3Conﬁgure the port from the list.

4Update the IP address.

5Apply the changes.

Maintaining the printer 170

For Macintosh users

1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.

2Type the IP address in the address ﬁeld.

3Apply the changes.

Setting up serial printing (Windows only)

1Set the parameters in the printer.

aFrom the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.

bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

cApply the changes.

2From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.

3Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.

4Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.

Notes:

•Serial printing reduces printing speed.

•Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

Notes:

•Perform this task after every few months.

•Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.

3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.

4Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.

Notes:

•Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the ﬁnish of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 171

•Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.

5Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

Cleaning the touch screen

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

2Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the touch screen.

Notes:

•Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the touch screen.

•Make sure that the touch screen is dry after cleaning.

3Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

Cleaning the scanner

1Open the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer 172

2Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass

•ADF glass pad

•Scanner glass

•Scanner glass pad

Maintaining the printer 173

3Open door E.

4Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass pad in door E

•ADF glass in door E

5Close door E, and then close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer 174

Cleaning the pick tires

1Turn o the printer.

2Remove the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

3Remove the pick roller.

4Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the pick tires.

Note: Apply isopropyl alcohol to the cloth.

Maintaining the printer 175

5Insert the pick roller.

6Insert the tray.

Cleaning the pick roller in the multipurpose feeder

1Turn o the printer.

2Open the multipurpose feeder.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 176

3Remove the pick roller.

4Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the pick roller.

Maintaining the printer 177

5Insert the pick roller.

6Close the multipurpose feeder.

7Turn on the printer.

Maintaining the printer 178

Cleaning the ADF pick roller

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

3Remove the ADF pick roller cover.

4Remove the ADF pick roller.

Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before

touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal

surface in an area away from the symbol.

Maintaining the printer 179

5Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the ADF pick roller..

6Insert the ADF pick roller until it clicks into place.

Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before

touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal

surface in an area away from the symbol.

Maintaining the printer 180

7Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.

8Close door D.

9Turn on the printer.

Cleaning the ADF feed roller

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

Maintaining the printer 181

3Remove the ADF pick roller cover.

4Remove the ADF feed roller.

Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before

touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal

surface in an area away from the symbol.

5Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the ADF feed roller.

Maintaining the printer 182

6Insert the ADF feed roller until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 183

7Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.

8Close door D.

9Turn on the printer.

Emptying the hole punch box

1Open door J.

Maintaining the printer 184

2Remove and empty the hole punch box.

3Insert the hole punch box.

4Close door J.

Maintaining the printer 185

Ordering parts and supplies

To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark

authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com or contact the

place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

1From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.

2Select the parts or supplies that you want to check.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home screen.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark parts and supplies. Use of third-party

supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. It can

also aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party parts and supplies is not covered by

the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark parts and supplies, and may deliver

unpredictable results if third-party parts and supplies are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended

life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and

remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any damage caused by non-genuine

supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause

damage to your printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error indicating

the presence of the reset item.

Ordering a toner cartridge

Notes:

•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.

•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.

Return Program toner cartridges

Item United

States and

Canada

European

Economic

Area

Asia Paciﬁc Latin

America

Rest of

Europe,

Middle East,

and Africa

Australia

and New

Zealand

Worldwide

Return

Program

toner

cartridge

58D1000 58D2000 58D3000 58D4000 58D5000 58D6000 58D000G

1 Available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark representative or system

administrator.

Maintaining the printer 186

Item United

States and

Canada

European

Economic

Area

Asia Paciﬁc Latin

America

Rest of

Europe,

Middle East,

and Africa

Australia

and New

Zealand

Worldwide

High yield

Return

Program

toner

cartridge

58D1H00 58D2H00 58D3H00 58D4H00 58D5H00 58D6H00 58D0H0G

High yield

Corporate

Return

Program

toner

cartridge1

58D1H0E 58D2H0E 58D3H0E 58D4H0E 58D5H0E 58D6H0E N/A

Extra high

yield Return

Program

toner

cartridge

58D1X00 58D2X00 58D3X00 58D4X00 58D5X00 58D6X00 58D0X0G

Extra high

yield

Corporate

Return

Program

toner

cartridge1

58D1X0E 58D2X0E 58D3X0E 58D4X0E 58D5X0E 58D6X0E N/A

Ultra high

yield Return

Program

toner

cartridge

58D1U00 58D2U00 58D3U00 58D4U00 58D5U00 58D6U00 58D0U0G

Ultra high

yield

Corporate

Return

Program

toner

cartridge1

58D1U0E 58D2U0E 58D3U0E 58D4U0E 58D5U0E 58D6U0E N/A

1 Available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark representative or system

administrator.

Maintaining the printer 187

Lexmark XM7355 and XM7370 Return Program toner cartridges

Item United States,

Canada, Australia,

and New Zealand

Europe, Middle East,

and Africa

Asia Paciﬁc Latin America

Return Program toner

cartridge

25B30861

25B30902

25B31011

25B31072

25B31211

25B31222

25B31281

25B31292

1 Supported only in the Lexmark XM7355 printer model.

2 Supported only in the Lexmark XM7370 printer model.

Regular toner cartridges

Item Worldwide

Ultra high yield toner cartridge 58D0UA0

Ordering an imaging unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail before the toner

exhaustion.

Item Lexmark Return Program Corporate Return Program*Regular

Imaging unit 58D0Z00 58D0Z0E 58D0ZA0

* This imaging unit is available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark

representative or system administrator.

Ordering a staple cartridge

Part name Part number

Staple cartridge 35S8500

Ordering a maintenance kit

To identify the supported fuser type, open door A, and then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit.

Find the two‑digit fuser type in front of the fuser, for example, 00 or 01.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Notes:

•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.

•The separator assembly, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are included in the maintenance

kit and can be ordered individually and replaced if necessary.

•For more information on replacing the maintenance kit, see the documentation that came with the kit.

Maintaining the printer 188

Return Program fuser maintenance kits

Fuser maintenance kit

type

Part number

Type 00 41X2233

Type 01 41X2234

Type 02 41X2235

Type 03 41X2236

Type 04 41X2237

Type 11 41X2242

Type 13 41X2243

Type 32 41X2250

Type 33 41X2251

Type 35 41X2252

Type 36 41X2253

Regular fuser maintenance kits

Fuser maintenance kit

type

Part number

Type 05 41X2238

Type 06 41X2239

Type 07 41X2240

Type 08 41X2241

Type 17 41X2244

Type 19 41X2245

Roller maintenance kit

Item Part number

Printer engine roller

maintenance kit

41X2352

Automatic document feeder maintenance kit

Item Part number

ADF maintenance kit 41X2351

Maintaining the printer 189

Replacing parts and supplies

Replacing the toner cartridge

1Open door A.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the used toner cartridge.

3Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.

Maintaining the printer 190

4Insert the new toner cartridge.

5Close the door.

Replacing the imaging unit

1Open door A.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the toner cartridge.

Maintaining the printer 191

3Remove the used imaging unit.

4Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the quality of

future print jobs.

5Remove the packing material.

Maintaining the printer 192

6Insert the new imaging unit.

7Insert the toner cartridge.

8Close the door.

Replacing the fuser

1Open door C.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 193

2Unlock the fuser.

3Remove the used fuser.

4Unpack the new fuser.

5Insert the new fuser until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 194

6Lock the fuser.

7Close the door.

Replacing the transfer roller

1Open door A.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the toner cartridge.

Maintaining the printer 195

3Remove the imaging unit.

4Remove the used transfer roller.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

5Unpack the new transfer roller.

Maintaining the printer 196

6Insert the new transfer roller until it clicks into place.

7Insert the imaging unit.

8Insert the toner cartridge.

9Close the door.

Replacing the pick roller

1Remove the tray.

Maintaining the printer 197

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the used pick roller.

3Unpack the new pick roller.

4Install the new pick roller.

5Insert the tray.

Maintaining the printer 198

Replacing the pick roller in the multipurpose feeder

1Open the multipurpose feeder.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the used pick roller.

3Unpack the new pick roller.

Maintaining the printer 199

4Install the new pick roller.

5Close the multipurpose feeder.

Replacing the ADF pick roller

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

Maintaining the printer 200

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

3Remove the ADF pick roller cover.

4Remove the used ADF pick roller.

Maintaining the printer 201

5Unpack the new ADF pick roller.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean

hands.

6Insert the new ADF pick roller until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 202

7Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.

8Close the door.

9Turn on the printer.

Replacing the ADF feed roller

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 203

3Remove the ADF pick roller cover.

4Remove the used ADF feed roller.

5Unpack the new ADF feed roller.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean

hands.

Maintaining the printer 204

6Insert the new ADF feed roller until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 205

7Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.

8Close the door.

9Turn on the printer.

Replacing the ADF separator roller

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 206

3Remove the ADF separator roller cover.

4Remove the used ADF separator roller.

5Unpack the new ADF separator roller.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean

hands.

Maintaining the printer 207

6Insert the new ADF separator roller until it clicks into place.

7Insert the ADF separator roller cover until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 208

8Close the door.

9Turn on the printer.

Replacing the ADF torque limiter

1Turn o the printer.

2Open door D.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

3Remove the ADF separator roller cover.

4Remove the ADF separator roller.

Maintaining the printer 209

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean

hands.

5Remove the used ADF torque limiter.

6Unpack the new ADF torque limiter.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean

hands.

7Insert the new ADF torque limiter.

Maintaining the printer 210

8Insert the ADF separator roller until it clicks into place.

9Insert the ADF separator roller cover until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 211

10 Close the door.

11 Turn on the printer.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple ﬁnisher

1Open door F.

2Remove the staple cartridge holder.

Maintaining the printer 212

3Remove the empty staple cartridge.

4Insert the new staple cartridge.

5Insert the staple cartridge holder.

6Close the door.

Maintaining the printer 213

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

1Depending on the staple cartridge to replace, open either door F or door G.

2Remove the staple cartridge holder.

Maintaining the printer 214

3Remove the empty staple cartridge.

4Insert the new staple cartridge.

5Insert the staple cartridge holder.

6Close the door.

Resetting the supply usage counters

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Supply Usage

And Counters.

2Select the counter that you want to reset.

Warning—Potential Damage: Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and

remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any damage caused by non-genuine

supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause

damage to your printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error indicating

the presence of the reset item.

Moving the printer

Moving the printer to another location

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require

two or more people to lift it safely.

Maintaining the printer 215

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal

injury or printer damage:

•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.

•If the printer has separate ﬂoor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect

them before moving the printer.

•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over

thresholds and breaks in ﬂooring.

•If the printer does not have a caster base but is conﬁgured with optional trays or output options, then remove

the output options and lift the printer o the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same

time.

•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.

•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the

options.

•Keep the printer in an upright position.

•Avoid severe jarring movements.

•Make sure that your ﬁngers are not under the printer when you set it down.

•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Shipping the printer

For shipping instructions, go to http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Saving energy and paper

Conﬁguring the power save mode settings

Sleep mode

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Sleep Mode.

2Specify the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Sleep Mode.

Hibernate mode

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout.

2Select the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Hibernate mode.

Maintaining the printer 216

Notes:

•For Hibernate Timeout to work, set Hibernate Timeout on Connection to Hibernate.

•The Embedded Web Server is disabled when the printer is in Hibernate mode.

Adjusting the brightness of the printer display

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Screen Brightness.

2Adjust the setting.

Conserving supplies

•Print on both sides of the paper.

Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.

•Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.

•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Recycling

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2Select the product you want to recycle.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark Collection and Recycling Program may be

recycled through your local recycling center.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are

transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to

dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource

savings. Lexmark also oers recycling of packaging components in some countries or regions. For more

information, go to www.lexmark.com/recycle, and then choose your country or region. Information on available

packaging recycling programs is included with the information on product recycling.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your

area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist

in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark recycles

the box.

Maintaining the printer 217

Clearing jams

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

•Make sure that the paper lies ﬂat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

•Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.

•Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper ﬁll indicator.

•Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

•Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or

envelopes.

•Push the tray ﬁrmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

•Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.

•Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

Clearing jams 218

•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.

•Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.

•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Identifying jam locations

Notes:

•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer ﬂushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed

page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.

•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.

Clearing jams 219

Jam locations

1Automatic document feeder

2Standard, ﬁnisher, or output option bin

3Door A

4Multipurpose feeder

5Trays

6Door C

7Finisher or output option rear door

•Door H

•Door N

•Door P

Paper jam in trays

1Remove the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: A sensor inside the optional tray is easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch a metal surface before removing the jammed paper in the tray.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Insert the tray.

Clearing jams 220

Paper jam in door A

1Open door A.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the toner cartridge.

3Remove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Clearing jams 221

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the quality of

future print jobs.

4Pull out the duplex unit.

5Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

6Insert the duplex unit.

Clearing jams 222

7Insert the imaging unit.

8Insert the toner cartridge.

9Close the door.

Paper jam in door C

1Open door C.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Remove the jammed paper from any of the following areas:

Clearing jams 223

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

•Fuser area

•Below the fuser area

•Duplex area

3Close the door.

Paper jam in the standard bin

Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 224

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder

1Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

Clearing jams 225

4Reload paper.

Paper jam in the automatic document feeder

1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

2Open door D.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

3Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4Close door D.

Clearing jams 226

5Open the scanner cover.

6Open door E.

7Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

8Close door E, and then close the scanner cover.

Clearing jams 227

Paper jam in the 4‑bin mailbox

Paper jam in door N

1Open door N.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Close the door.

Paper jam in the mailbox bin

Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 228

Paper jam in the oset stacker or staple ﬁnisher

Paper jam in door H

1Open door H.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 229

3Close the door.

Paper jam in the oset stacker or staple ﬁnisher bin

Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 230

Paper jam in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

Paper jam in door P

1Open door P.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Close the door.

Paper jam in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher bin

Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 231

Staple jam in the staple ﬁnisher

1Open door F.

Clearing jams 232

2Remove the staple cartridge holder.

3Remove the loose staples.

Clearing jams 233

4Press the staples against the metal bracket.

Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the

staples near the metal bracket.

5Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.

6Close the door.

Clearing jams 234

Staple jam in the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

1Depending on the staple jam location, open either door F or door G.

2Remove the staple cartridge holder.

Clearing jams 235

3Remove the loose staples.

4Press the staples against the metal bracket.

Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the

staples near the metal bracket.

Clearing jams 236

5Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.

6Close the door.

Clearing jams 237

Troubleshooting

Print quality problems

Find the image that resembles the print quality problem you are having, and then click the link below it to read

problem-solving steps.

“Blank or white pages” on

page 239

“Dark print” on page 241 “Fine lines are not printed

correctly” on page 242

“Folded or wrinkled paper”

on page 243

“Gray background” on

page 244

“Horizontal light bands”

on page 256

“Incorrect margins” on

page 246

“Light print” on page 247

“Mottled print and dots” on

page 249

“Paper curl” on page 276 “Print crooked or skewed”

on page 250

“Repeating defects” on

page 264

Troubleshooting 238

“Solid black pages” on

page 250

“Text or images cut o” on

page 253

“Toner easily rubs o” on

page 255

“Vertical dark bands” on

page 258

“Vertical dark lines or

streaks” on page 261

“Vertical dark streaks with

print missing” on

page 262

“Vertical light bands” on

page 256

“Vertical white lines” on

page 257

Printing problems

Print quality is poor

Blank or white pages

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 239

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing blank or white pages?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove any packing material that is left on the imaging unit.

1Remove the toner cartridge, and then remove the imaging

unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging

unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended

exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so

may aect the quality of future print jobs.

2Check the imaging unit for signs of damage.

Note: Make sure that the photoconductor drum contact is

not bent or out of place.

3Firmly shake the imaging unit to redistribute the toner.

4Insert the imaging unit, and then insert the toner cartridge.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing blank or white pages?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

Check the transfer roller for proper installation.

Is the transfer roller installed properly?

Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

Step 4

aRemove, and then insert the transfer roller.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing blank or white pages?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing blank or white pages?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 240

Dark print

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bReduce toner darkness.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

cPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 241

Action Yes No

Step 4

Check if the paper has texture or rough ﬁnishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Go to step 5. Go to step 6.

Step 5

aReplace textured paper with plain paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 7. The problem is

solved.

Step 7

aRemove, and then insert the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Go to step 8. The problem is

solved.

Step 8

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Is the print dark?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Fine lines are not printed correctly

Troubleshooting 242

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Are ﬁne lines not printed correctly?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aAdjust the print quality settings.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Pixel Boost > Fonts

2Adjust Toner Darkness to 7. From the control panel, navigate

to:

Settings > Print > Quality

bPrint the document.

Are ﬁne lines not printed correctly?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Folded or wrinkled paper

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 243

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper folded or wrinkled?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper folded or wrinkled?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting from the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper folded or wrinkled?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Gray background

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 244

Action Yes No

Step 1

aTurn o the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

bDecrease toner darkness.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

cPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting from the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aRemove, and then insert the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 245

Action Yes No

Step 5

aUpdate the printer ﬁrmware. For more information, see

“Updating ﬁrmware” on page 318.

bPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Does gray background appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Incorrect margins

Action Yes No

Step 1

aAdjust the paper guides to the correct position for the paper

loaded.

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aSet the paper size.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 246

Light print

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bIncrease toner darkness.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

cPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 247

Action Yes No

Step 4

aDepending on your operating system, specify the print

resolution from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

bSet the resolution to 600 dpi.

cPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aRemove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light can cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bFirmly shake the imaging unit to redistribute the toner.

cInsert the imaging unit.

dTurn o the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

ePrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aCheck the status of the toner cartridge.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Device > Device Statistics

bFrom the Supply Information section of the pages printed,

check the status of the toner cartridge.

Is the toner cartridge near end of life?

Go to step 7. Contact customer

support.

Step 7

aReplace the toner cartridge.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 248

Mottled print and dots

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the print mottled?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

Check the printer for leaked toner contamination.

Is the printer free of leaked toner?

Go to step 3. Contact customer

support.

Step 3

Check the status of the imaging unit. From the control panel,

navigate to:

Status/Supplies > Supplies

Is the imaging unit near end of life?

Go to step 4. Contact customer

support.

Step 4

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Is the print mottled?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 249

Print crooked or skewed

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the home screen, touch Settings >

Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aPull out the tray.

bRemove the paper, and then load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

cSqueeze and slide the paper guides to the correct position for

the size of the paper you are loading.

dInsert the tray.

ePrint the document.

Is the print crooked or skewed?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aCheck if you are printing on a supported paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the print crooked or skewed?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Solid black pages

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 250

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove, and then insert the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 251

Action Yes No

Step 3

aRemove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bRemove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.

Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the

charge roller and photoconductor drum.

cInsert the imaging unit.

dPrint the document.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

Check the imaging unit for signs of damage.

Is the imaging unit free from damage?

Contact customer

support.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 252

Text or images cut o

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove, and then insert the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 253

Action Yes No

Step 3

aRemove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bRemove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.

Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the

charge roller and photoconductor drum.

cInsert the imaging unit.

dPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 254

Toner easily rubs o

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel.

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aRemove, and then insert the fuser.

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 255

Horizontal light bands

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do horizontal light bands appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bPrint the document.

Do horizontal light bands appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical light bands

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 256

Action Yes No

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical light bands appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical white lines

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

Fix slow printing problems. For more information, see “Slow

printing” on page 265.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 257

Vertical dark bands

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove the toner cartridge, and then remove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bInsert the imaging unit, and then insert the cartridge.

cPrint the document.

Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 258

Action Yes No

Step 3

aRemove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bRemove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.

Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the

charge roller and photoconductor drum.

cInsert the imaging unit.

dPrint the document.

Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aCheck if a bright light enters the right side of the printer, and

move the printer if necessary.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 259

Vertical dark lines

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

Using a blank sheet of paper, make a two‑sided copy using the

ADF.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 2. Go to step 3.

Step 2

Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass pad (A) and ADF glass (B)

•ADF glass (A) and ADF glass pad (B) in door E

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 260

Action Yes No

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light can cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical dark lines or streaks

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 261

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light can cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical dark streaks with print missing

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 262

Action Yes No

Step 1

aRemove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit

to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure

to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bRemove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.

Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the

charge roller and photoconductor drum.

cInsert the imaging unit.

dPrint the document.

Do vertical dark streaks with missing images appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark streaks with missing images appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 263

Repeating defects

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

Using the Print Quality Test Pages, check if the distance

between the repeating defects is equal to any of the following:

•96 mm (3.78 in.)

•49 mm (1.93 in.)

•47.5 mm (1.87 in.)

•30.2 mm (1.18 in.)

Does the distance between the repeating defects match any of the

measurements?

Go to step 2. Take note of the

distance, and then

contact customer

support.

Step 2

aReplace the imaging unit.

bPrint the document.

Do the repeating defects appear?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print

dialog, and then check if you have selected the correct printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 264

Action Yes No

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is on.

bResolve any error messages that appear on the display.

cPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aCheck if the ports are working and if the cables are securely

connected to the computer and the printer.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came

with the printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aRemove, and then reinstall the print driver.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Slow printing

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the printer cable is securely connected to the

printer and to the computer, print server, option, or other network

device.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aMake sure that the printer is not in Quiet Mode.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance

> Conﬁguration Menu > Device Operations > Quiet Mode.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 265

Action Yes No

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the print

resolution from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

bSet the resolution to 600 dpi.

cPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aFrom the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality > Print

Resolution.

bSet the resolution to 600 dpi.

cPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel.

•Heavier paper prints more slowly.

•Paper narrower than letter, A4, and legal may print more

slowly.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aMake sure that the printer settings for texture and weight match

the paper being loaded.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Media

Conﬁguration > Media Types.

Note: Rough paper textures and heavy paper weights may

print more slowly.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 7. The problem is

solved.

Step 7

Remove held jobs.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 8. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 266

Action Yes No

Step 8

aMake sure that the printer is not overheating.

Notes:

•Allow the printer to cool down after a long print job.

•Observe the recommended ambient temperature for the

printer. For more information, see “Selecting a location

for the printer” on page 12.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Adjusting toner darkness

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality.

2In the Toner Darkness menu, adjust the settings.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if you are printing on the correct paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed on the correct paper?

Go to step 2. Load the correct

paper size and paper

type.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the settings on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bMake sure that the settings match the paper loaded.

cPrint the document.

Is the document printed on the correct paper?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aCheck if the trays are linked.

For more information, see “Linking trays” on page 38.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed from the correct tray?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 267

Conﬁdential and other held documents do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the control panel, check if the documents appear in the

Held Jobs list.

Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the

documents using the Print and Hold options.

bPrint the documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

•Delete the print job, and then send it again.

•For PDF ﬁles, generate a new ﬁle, and then print the

documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading

the multiple job titles as duplicates.

For Windows users

aOpen the Printing Preferences dialog.

bFrom the Print and Hold tab, click Use Print and Hold, and then

click Keep duplicate documents.

cEnter a PIN, and then save the changes.

dSend the print job.

For Macintosh users

aSave and name each job dierently.

bSend the job individually.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aDelete some held jobs to free up printer memory.

bPrint the documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aAdd printer memory.

bPrint the documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 268

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the power cord is connected to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or

electrical shock, connect the power cord to an appropriately

rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the

product and easily accessible.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?

Turn on the switch or

reset the breaker.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check if the printer is on.

Is the printer on?

Go to step 4. Turn on the printer.

Step 4

Check if the printer is in Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Is the printer in Sleep or Hibernate mode?

Press the power

button to wake the

printer.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are

inserted to the correct ports.

Are the cables inserted to the correct ports?

Go to step 6. Insert the cables to

the correct ports.

Step 6

Turn o the printer, install the hardware options, and then turn on

the printer.

For more information, see the documentation that came with the

option.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 7.

Step 7

Install the correct print driver.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 8.

Step 8

Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 269

Unable to read ﬂash drive

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the printer is not busy processing another print, copy,

scan, or fax job.

Is the printer ready?

Go to step 2. Wait for the printer to

ﬁnish processing the

other job.

Step 2

Check if the ﬂash drive is supported. For more information, see

“Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types” on page 48.

Is the ﬂash drive supported?

Go to step 3. Insert a supported

ﬂash drive.

Step 3

aCheck if the USB port is enabled. For more information, see

“Enabling the USB port” on page 270.

bRemove, and then insert the ﬂash drive.

Does the printer recognize the ﬂash drive?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Enabling the USB port

From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > USB > Enable USB Port.

Network connection problems

Cannot open Embedded Web Server

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the printer is on.

Is the printer on?

Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.

Step 2

Make sure that the printer IP address is correct.

Notes:

•View the IP address on the home screen.

•An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by

periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Is the printer IP address correct?

Go to step 3. Type the correct

printer IP address in

the address ﬁeld.

Troubleshooting 270

Action Yes No

Step 3

Check if you are using a supported browser:

•Internet Explorer version 11 or later

•Microsoft Edge

•Safari version 6 or later

•Google ChromeTM version 32 or later

•Mozilla Firefox version 24 or later

Is your browser supported?

Go to step 4. Install a supported

browser.

Step 4

Check if the network connection is working.

Is the network connection working?

Go to step 5. Contact your

administrator.

Step 5

Make sure that the cable connections to the printer and print server

are secure. For more information, see the documentation that

came with the printer.

Are the cable connections secure?

Go to step 6. Secure the cable

connections.

Step 6

Check if the web proxy servers are disabled.

Are the web proxy servers disabled?

Go to step 7. Contact your

administrator.

Step 7

Access the Embedded Web Server.

Did the Embedded Web Server open?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Cannot connect the printer to the Wi‑Fi network

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that Active Adapter is set to Auto.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network

Overview > Active Adapter > Auto.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check if the correct Wi‑Fi network is selected.

Note: Some routers may share the default SSID.

Are you connecting to the correct Wi‑Fi network?

Go to step 4. Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting 271

Action Yes No

Step 3

Connect to the correct Wi‑Fi network. For more information, see

“Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 167.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

Check the wireless security mode.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless

> Wireless Security Mode.

Is the correct wireless security mode selected?

Go to step 6. Go to step 5.

Step 5

Select the correct wireless security mode.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 6.

Step 6

Make sure that you entered the correct network password.

Note: Take note of the spaces, numbers, and capitalization in the

password.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Checking the printer connectivity

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.

2Check the ﬁrst section of the network setup page, and conﬁrm that the status is connected.

If the status is not connected, then the LAN drop may be inactive, or the network cable may be unplugged

or malfunctioning. Contact your administrator for assistance.

Troubleshooting 272

Hardware options problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No

Step 1

Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the internal option

appears in the Installed Features list.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Go to step 4. Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check if the internal option is installed properly into the controller

board.

aTurn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the

electrical outlet.

bMake sure that the internal option is installed in the appropriate

connector in the controller board.

cConnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn

on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre

or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an

appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet

that is near the product and easily accessible.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aCheck if the internal option is available in the print driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the internal option in the

print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more

information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”

on page 317.

bResend the print job.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Defective ﬂash detected

Try one or more of the following:

•Replace the defective ﬂash memory.

•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting 273

•Cancel the current print job.

Not enough free space in ﬂash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the ﬂash memory.

•Install ﬂash memory with larger capacity.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the ﬂash memory are deleted.

Unformatted ﬂash detected

Try one or more of the following:

•From the control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.

•Format the ﬂash memory.

Note: If the error message remains, then the ﬂash memory may be defective and needs to be

replaced.

Issues with supplies

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch

To correct this problem, purchase a cartridge with the correct region that matches the printer region, or

purchase a worldwide cartridge.

•The ﬁrst number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the printer.

•The second number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the cartridge.

Printer and toner cartridge regions

Region Numeric code

Worldwide or Undeﬁned region 0

North America (United States, Canada) 1

European Economic Area, Western Europe, Nordic countries, Switzerland 2

Asia Paciﬁc 3

Latin America 4

Rest of Europe, Middle East, Africa 5

Australia, New Zealand 6

Invalid region 9

Note: To ﬁnd the region settings of the printer and toner cartridge, print the print quality test pages.

From the control panel, navigate to: Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.

Troubleshooting 274

Non‑Lexmark supply

The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-

party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging

components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable

results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may

damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.

Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your

printer, from the control panel, press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds.

If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and

install a genuine Lexmark supply or part. For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and

supplies” on page 186.

If the printer does not print after pressing and holding X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds, then reset

the supply usage counter.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Supply Usage And Counters

2Select the part or supply that you want to reset, and then select Start.

3Read the warning message, and then select Continue.

4Press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message.

Note: If you are unable to reset the supply usage counters, then return the item to the place of

purchase.

Paper feed problems

Envelope seals when printing

Action Yes No

Step 1

aUse an envelope that has been stored in a dry environment.

Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can

seal the ﬂaps.

bSend the print job.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 275

Action Yes No

Step 2

aMake sure that paper type is set to Envelope.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bSend the print job.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Collated printing does not work

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Layout > Collate

bTo uc h On [1,2,1,2,1,2].

cPrint the document.

Is the document collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the document that you are trying to print, open the Print

dialog, and then select Collate.

bPrint the document.

Is the document collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aReduce the number of pages to print.

bPrint the document.

Are the pages collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Paper curl

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 276

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the paper loaded is supported.

Note: If paper is not supported, then load a supported paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark

toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a

supported one.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aAdjust the guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper

loaded.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aRemove paper, ﬂip it over, and then reload paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 277

Tray linking does not work

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the trays contain the same paper size and paper type.

bCheck if the paper guides are positioned correctly.

cPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, touch Settings > Paper > Tray

Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bSet the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded

in the linked trays.

cPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aMake sure that Tray Linking is set to Automatic. For more

information, see “Linking trays” on page 38.

bPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No

Step 1

aRemove the tray.

bCheck if paper is loaded correctly.

Notes:

•Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly.

•Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum

paper ﬁll indicator.

•Make sure to print on recommended paper size and type.

cInsert the tray.

dPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 278

Action Yes No

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bSet the correct paper size and type.

cPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations > Jam Content Recovery

bIn the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.

cPrint the document.

Are the jammed pages reprinted?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 279

E-mailing problems

Cannot send e‑mails

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the e‑mail SMTP settings are conﬁgured correctly.

For more information, see “Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings”

on page 55.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that you are using the correct password. Depending on

your e‑mail service provider, use your account password, app

password, or authentication password. For more information, see

“Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 55.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Faxing problems

Caller ID is not shown

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Setting up

the printer to fax” on page 64.

Action Yes No

Enable caller ID.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax

Receive Settings > Admin Controls > Enable Caller ID.

Does the caller ID appear?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 280

Cannot send or receive faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Resolve any error messages that appear on the display.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that the cable connections for the following equipment

are secure:

•Telephone

•Handset

•Answering machine

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check for a dial tone.

•Call the fax number to check if it is working properly.

•If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the

volume to check if you hear a dial tone.

Can you hear a dial tone?

Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

Step 4

Check the telephone wall jack.

aConnect the analog telephone directly to the wall jack.

bListen for a dial tone.

cIf you do not hear a dial tone, then use a dierent telephone

cable.

dIf you still do not hear a dial tone, then connect the analog

telephone to a dierent wall jack.

eIf you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 281

Action Yes No

Step 5

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or to

the correct digital connector.

•If you are using an Integrated Services for Digital Network

(ISDN) telephone service, then connect to an analog telephone

port of an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information, contact

your ISDN provider.

•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL ﬁlter or router that

supports analog use. For more information, contact your DSL

provider.

•If you are using a private branch exchange (PBX) telephone

service, then make sure that you are connecting to an analog

connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing

an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 6.

Step 6

Temporarily disconnect other equipment and disable other

telephone services.

aDisconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,

computers, modems, or telephone line splitters) between the

printer and the telephone line.

bDisable call waiting and voice mail. For more information,

contact your telephone company.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 7.

Step 7

Scan the original document one page at a time.

aDial the fax number.

bScan the document.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 282

Can receive but not send faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Load an original document properly into the ADF tray or on the

scanner glass.

Can you send faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Set up the shortcut number properly.

•Check if the shortcut number is set for the telephone number

that you want to dial.

•Dial the telephone number manually.

Can you send faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Can send but not receive faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the paper source is not empty.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check the ring count delay settings.

From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax

Receive Settings > Rings to Answer.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

If the printer is printing blank pages, then see “Blank or white

pages” on page 239.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Cannot set up etherFAX

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check the printer connectivity.

aPrint the Network Setup Page. From the home screen, touch

Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.

bCheck the network status.

Is the printer connected to the network?

Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 283

Action Yes No

Step 2

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you set up etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Make sure that etherFAX is set up correctly. For more information,

see “Setting up the fax function using etherFAX” on page 66.

Can you set up etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to

https://www.etherfa

x.net/lexmark.

Cannot send or receive faxes using etherFAX

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup >

General Fax Settings.

bMake sure that you have the correct fax number.

cMake sure that Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Split large documents into smaller ﬁle sizes.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to

https://www.etherfa

x.net/lexmark.

Poor fax print quality

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that there are no print quality defects.

aFrom the control panel, touch Settings > Troubleshooting >

Print Quality Test Pages.

bCorrect any print quality defects. For more information, see

“Print quality is poor” on page 239.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 284

Action Yes No

Step 2

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.

aFrom the control panel, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax

Receive Settings > Admin Controls.

bIn the Max Speed menu, select a lower transmission speed.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Missing information on the fax cover page

Action No Yes

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bSend or retrieve the fax.

Is there missing information on the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Cannot send the fax cover page from the computer

Action Yes No

Step 1

aMake sure that the print driver is updated. For more information,

see “Installing the printer software” on page 316.

bSend the fax.

Can you send the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print

dialog.

bSelect the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences,

Options, or Setup.

cClick Fax, and then clear the Always display settings prior to

faxing setting.

dSend the fax.

Can you send the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 285

Scanning problems

Cannot scan to a computer

Action Yes No

Step 1

Perform a copy job.

Is the copy job successful?

Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

Step 2

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it

back on.

bScan the document.

Can you scan the document to a computer?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check the printer connectivity.

aPrint the Network Setup Page. From the control panel, navigate

to:

Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page

bCheck the network status.

Is the printer connected to the network?

Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

Step 4

aConnect the printer to the network.

bScan the document.

Can you scan the document to a computer?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aMake sure that the printer and the computer are connected to

the same network.

bScan the document.

Can you scan the document to a computer?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 286

Cannot scan to a network folder

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCreate a network folder shortcut.

bScan a document using the shortcut. For more information, see

“Scanning to a network folder” on page 78.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that the network folder path and format are correct. For

example, //server_hostname/foldername/path, where

server_hostname is a fully qualiﬁed domain (FQDN) or IP

address.

Is the network folder path and format correct?

Go to step 3. Go to step 4.

Step 3

Make sure that you have a write access permission to the network

folder.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Troubleshooting 287

Action Yes No

Step 4

Update the network folder shortcut.

aOpen a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in

the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP

address appears as four sets of numbers separated by

periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it

to load the web page correctly.

bClick Shortcuts, and then select a shortcut.

Note: If you have multiple shortcut types, then select

Network Folder.

cIn the Share Path ﬁeld, type the network folder path.

Notes:

•If your share path is \\server_hostname

\foldername\path, then

type //server_hostname/foldername/path.

•Make sure that you use forward slashes when typing the

share path.

dFrom the Authentication menu, select your authentication

method.

Note: If Authentication is set to “Use assigned username and

password,” then in the User Name and Password ﬁelds, type

your credentials.

eClick Save.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

Make sure that the printer and the network folder are connected

to the same network.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Partial copies of document or photo

Action Yes No

Step 1

aMake sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on

the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

bCopy the document or photo.

Is the document or photo copied correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 288

Action Yes No

Step 2

aMatch the paper size setting and the paper loaded in the tray.

bCopy the document or photo.

Is the document or photo copied correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No

Step 1

aClean the scanner glass and the ADF glass with a damp, soft,

lint‑free cloth. If your printer has a second ADF glass inside the

ADF, then also clean that glass.

For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner” on page

172.

bMake sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on

the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

cCopy the document or photo.

Is the copy quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aCheck the quality of the original document or photo.

bAdjust the scan quality settings.

cCopy the document or photo.

Is the copy quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Vertical dark streaks on output when scanning from the ADF

ABCDE

Leading edge

Trailing edge

Troubleshooting 289

Action Yes No

aOpen the scanner cover.

bUsing a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the ADF glass and the

ADF glass pad.

cClose the scanner cover.

dScan the document.

Do vertical streaks appear on scanned documents?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Jagged image or text when scanning from the ADF

Action Yes No

aLoad 50 sheets of clean, plain paper into the ADF.

Note: The plain paper helps clean or remove dust and other

coating from the ADF feed rollers.

bFrom the control panel, press .

cLoad an original document into the ADF.

dScan the document.

Do jagged images or texts appear on the output?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check the cable connections.

aMake sure that the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected

to the computer and the printer.

bResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 290

Action Yes No

Step 2

Check the ﬁle you want to scan.

aMake sure that the ﬁle name is not already used in the

destination folder.

bMake sure that the document or photo you want to scan is not

open in another application.

cResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aMake sure that the Append time stamp or the Overwrite

existing ﬁle check box is selected in the destination

conﬁguration settings.

bResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scanner does not close

Action Yes No

Remove obstructions that keep the scanner cover open.

Did the scanner cover close correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No

Close all applications that are interfering with the scan.

Does scanning take too long or freeze the computer?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 291

Scanner does not respond

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the power cord is connected properly to the printer

and the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre

or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an

appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet

that is near the product and easily accessible.

bCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is turned on.

bResolve any error messages that appear on the display.

cCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the

printer on.

bCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Adjusting scanner registration

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Scanner

Conﬁguration > Scanner Manual Registration.

2In the Print Quick Test menu, touch Start.

3Place the Print Quick Test page on the scanner glass, and then touch Flatbed Registration.

4In the Copy Quick Test menu, touch Start.

5Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.

Note: If the margins of the test page are dierent from the original document, then adjust Left Margin and

Top Margin.

6Repeat step 4 and step 5 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.

Adjusting ADF registration

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Scanner

Conﬁguration > Scanner Manual Registration.

2In the Print Quick Test menu, touch Start.

Troubleshooting 292

3Place the Print Quick Test page on the ADF tray.

4Tou ch Front ADF Registration or Rear ADF Registration.

Notes:

•To align Front ADF Registration, place the test page faceup, short edge ﬁrst into the ADF.

•To align Rear ADF Registration, place the test page facedown, short edge ﬁrst into the ADF.

5In the Copy Quick Test menu, touch Start.

6Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.

Note: If the margins of the test page are dierent from the original document, then adjust Horizontal

Adjust and Top Margin.

7Repeat step 5 and step 6 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.

Contacting customer support

Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:

•Printer problem

•Error message

•Printer model type and serial number

Go to http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,

support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.

Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries

or regions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Troubleshooting 293

Upgrading and migrating

Hardware

Available internal options

•Memory cards

–DDR3 DIMM

–Flash memory

•Optional cards

–Font cards

–Firmware cards

•Forms and Bar Code

•PRESCRIBE

•IPDS

•Printer hard disk

•Internal solutions port

–Parallel 1284‑B Interface Card

–RS‑232C Serial Interface Card

–Fiber Interface Card

–N8370 802.11a/b/g/n/ac Wireless Print Server Interface Card

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat-head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 294

4Install any supported internal options. For more information, see the documentation that came with the

option.

Upgrading and migrating 295

5Close the access cover.

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Installing a memory card

Note: These instructions apply only to the DDR3 DIMM memory card.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 296

4Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.

5Insert the memory card until it clicks into place.

Upgrading and migrating 297

6Close the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Installing an optional card

Note: An optional card is either a font card, ﬁrmware card, or ﬂash memory.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any components or connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 298

4Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.

5Push the card ﬁrmly into place.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be ﬂush against the controller

board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the

controller board.

Upgrading and migrating 299

6Close the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Installing a printer hard disk

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 300

4Unpack the hard disk.

5Attach the hard disk, and then connect the hard disk interface cable to the controller board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch or press the center of the hard disk.

Upgrading and migrating 301

6Close the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Installing an internal solutions port

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

2Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 302

3Unpack the internal solutions port (ISP) kit.

1ISP

2Mounting bracket

3Thumbscrews

4If necessary, remove the printer hard disk.

5Insert the bracket into the board until it clicks into place.

Upgrading and migrating 303

6Attach the ISP to the bracket.

7If necessary, attach the hard disk to the ISP.

aRemove the hard disk bracket.

bConnect the hard disk to the ISP.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch or press the center of the hard disk.

Upgrading and migrating 304

Upgrading and migrating 305

8Close the access cover.

9Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

Installing the 550‑sheet tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.

Note: If optional trays are already installed, then unlock them from the printer before lifting the printer. Do

not try to lift the printer and trays at the same time.

4Align the printer with the optional tray, and then lower the printer until it clicks into place.

Upgrading and migrating 306

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may

require two or more people to lift it safely.

5Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

6Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available

options in the print driver” on page 317.

Installing the 2100‑sheet tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.

Note: If optional trays are already installed, then unlock them from the printer before lifting the printer. Do

not try to lift the printer and trays at the same time.

4Install the tray on the caster base.

Note: Make sure that the caster base wheels are locked.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the tray weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require

two or more people to lift it safely.

Upgrading and migrating 307

5Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer until it clicks into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may

require two or more people to lift it safely.

Upgrading and migrating 308

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available

options in the print driver” on page 317.

Upgrading and migrating 309

Installing the 4‑bin mailbox

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the mailbox.

4Remove the printer top cover.

5Install the mailbox to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the printer.

Upgrading and migrating 310

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Add the mailbox in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding

available options in the print driver” on page 317.

Installing the oset stacker

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the oset stacker.

4Remove the printer top cover.

Upgrading and migrating 311

5Install the oset stacker to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the

printer.

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Add the oset stacker in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Addi ng

available options in the print driver” on page 317.

Installing the staple ﬁnisher

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the staple ﬁnisher.

Upgrading and migrating 312

4Remove the printer top cover.

5Install the staple ﬁnisher to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to

the printer.

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Add the staple ﬁnisher in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding

available options in the print driver” on page 317.

Upgrading and migrating 313

Installing the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the staple, hole punch ﬁnisher.

4Remove the printer top cover.

5Install the ﬁnisher to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the printer.

Upgrading and migrating 314

6Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

7Turn on the printer.

Add the ﬁnisher in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Addi ng

available options in the print driver” on page 317.

Software

Supported operating systems

Using the software CD, you can install the printer software on the following operating systems:

•Windows 10

•Windows 8.1

•Windows Server 2012 R2

•Windows Server 2012

•Windows 7 SP1

•Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1

•Windows Server 2008 SP2

•Windows Vista SP2

•Mac OS X version 10.7 or later

•Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS

•openSUSE Linux

•SUSE Linux Enterprise Server

•Debian GNU/Linux

•Ubuntu

•Fedora

•IBM AIX

•Oracle Solaris SPARC

•Oracle Solaris x86

Notes:

•For Windows operating systems, the print drivers and utilities are supported in both 32‑ and 64‑bit

versions.

•For drivers and utilities that are compatible with Mac OS X version 10.6 or earlier and for speciﬁc

supported Linux or UNIX operating system versions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

•For more information on software compatibility with all other operating systems, contact customer

support.

Upgrading and migrating 315

Installing the printer software

Notes:

•The print driver is included in the software installer package.

•For Macintosh computers with macOS version 10.7 or later, you do not need to install the driver to print

on an AirPrint-certiﬁed printer. If you want custom printing features, then download the print driver.

1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

•From the software CD that came with your printer.

•Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.

2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Installing the fax driver

1Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for your printer model, and then download the appropriate

installer package.

2From your computer, click Printer Properties, and then navigate to the Conﬁguration tab.

3Select Fax, and then click Apply.

Adding printers to a computer

Before you begin, do one of the following:

•Connect the printer and the computer to the same network. For more information on connecting the printer

to a network, see “Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 167.

•Connect the computer to the printer. For more information, see “Connecting a computer to the printer” on

page 169.

•Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable. For more information, see “Attaching cables” on

page 16.

Note: The USB cable is sold separately.

For Windows users

1From a computer, install the print driver.

Note: For more information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 316.

2Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.

3Depending on your printer connection, do one of the following:

•Select a printer from the list, and then click Add device.

•Click Show Wi‑Fi Direct printers, select a printer, and then click Add device.

•Click The printer that I want isn’t listed, and then from the Add Printer window, do the following:

aSelect Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.

bIn the “Hostname or IP address” ﬁeld, type the printer IP address, and then click Next.

Upgrading and migrating 316

Notes:

–View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

–If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

cSelect a print driver, and then click Next.

dSelect Use the print driver that is currently installed (recommended), and then click Next.

eType a printer name, and then click Next.

fSelect a printer sharing option, and then click Next.

gClick Finish.

For Macintosh users

1From a computer, open Printers & Scanners.

2Click , and then select a printer.

3From the Use menu, select a print driver.

Notes:

•To use the Macintosh print driver, select either AirPrint or Secure AirPrint.

•If you want custom printing features, then select the Lexmark print driver. To install the driver, see

“Installing the printer software” on page 316.

4Add the printer.

Adding available options in the print driver

For Windows users

1Open the printers folder.

2Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:

•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.

•For earlier versions, select Properties.

3Navigate to the Conﬁguration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.

4Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.

2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.

3Apply the changes.

Upgrading and migrating 317

Firmware

Exporting or importing a conﬁguration ﬁle

You can export the conﬁguration settings of your printer into a text ﬁle, and then import the ﬁle to apply the

settings to other printers.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2From the Embedded Web Server, click Export Conﬁguration or Import Conﬁguration.

3Follow the instructions on the screen.

4If the printer supports applications, then do the following:

aClick Apps > select the application > Conﬁgure.

bClick Export or Import.

Updating ﬁrmware

Some applications require a minimum device ﬁrmware level to operate correctly.

For more information on updating the device ﬁrmware, contact your Lexmark representative.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Update Firmware.

3Do either of the following:

•Click Check for updates > I agree, start update.

•Upload the ﬂash ﬁle.

Note: To get the latest ﬁrmware, go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, and then search for your

printer model.

aBrowse to the ﬂash ﬁle.

Note: Make sure that you have extracted the ﬁrmware zip ﬁle.

bClick Upload > Start.

Upgrading and migrating 318

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark MX822ade, Lexmark MX822adtfe, Lexmark MX822adxe, Lexmark MX822de; Lexmark MX826ade,

Lexmark MX826adtfe, Lexmark MX826adxe, Lexmark MX826de; Lexmark XM7355, Lexmark XM7355b,

Lexmark XM7355bi, Lexmark XM7355i; Lexmark XM7370, Lexmark XM7370i MFPs

Machine type:

7465

Models:

436, 496, 836, 896

Edition notice

February 2021

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local

law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of

express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made

to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the

products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to

make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is

not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally

equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be

used instead. Evaluation and veriﬁcation of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,

except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

For information on Lexmark's privacy policy governing the use of this product, go to

www.lexmark.com/privacy.

For information on supplies and downloads, go to www.lexmark.com.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is deﬁned in 48

C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are

used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.

Notices 319

227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software

Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only

those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Trademarks

Lexmark and the Lexmark logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc. in the

United States and/or other countries.

Gmail, Android, Google Play, and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.

Macintosh, Safari, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App

Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the Works

with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work speciﬁcally with the technology

identiﬁed in the badge and has been certiﬁed by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

The Mopria® word mark is a registered and/or unregistered trademark of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United

States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s

designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer

is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used

in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES directory of the

installation software CD.

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO

9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing One-sided: 54 (MX822, XM7355); 56

(MX826, XM7370)

Two-sided: 53 (MX822, XM7355); 55

(MX826, XM7370)

Scanning 57

Copying 58 (MX822, XM7355); 59 (MX826,

XM7370)

Ready 14

Notices 320

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signiﬁes speciﬁc recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the

European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your

local sales oce phone number.

India E-Waste notice

This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the “India E-Waste Rules”

and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated

diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the

exemption set in the Rule.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local

authorities for disposal and recycling options.

EU battery directive

This product may contain a coin‑cell lithium rechargeable battery. This product is in compliance with EU

Directive 2006/66/EC as amended by Directive 2008/12/EC, 2008/103/EC, and 2013/56/EU.

Notices 321

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse

or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or

demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:

1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2Select the product that you want to recycle.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identiﬁes static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without ﬁrst touching

a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.

To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge when performing maintenance tasks such as clearing paper

jams or replacing supplies, touch any exposed metal frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior

areas of the printer even if the symbol is not present.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR® emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certiﬁed to

comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as of the date of manufacture.

Temperature information

Operating temperature and relative humidity 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F) and 15 to 80% RH

15.3 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 15% RH

Maximum wet bulb temperature: 22.8°C (73°F)

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit long-

term storage1

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit short-term

shipping

-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)

1 Supplies shelf life is approximately 2 years. This is based on storage in a standard oce environment at 22°C (72°F)

and 45% humidity.

2 Wet-bulb temperature is determined by the air temperature and the relative humidity.

Notices 322

Laser notice

The printer is certiﬁed in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for

Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certiﬁed as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements

of IEC 60825-1: 2014.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there

is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance,

or prescribed service conditions. The printer has a non-serviceable printhead assembly that contains a laser

with the following speciﬁcations:

Class: IIIb (3b) AlGaAs

Nominal output power (milliwatts): 25

Wavelength (nanometers): 755–800

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)

Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from

electronic inputs.

One-sided: 690 (MX822, XM7355); 850

(MX826, XM7370)

Two-sided: 490 (MX822, XM7355); 640

(MX826, XM7370)

Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from

hard‑copy original documents.

750 (MX822, XM7355); 900 (MX826, XM7370)

Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 84 (MX822, XM7355); 86 (MX826, XM7370)

Ready The product is waiting for a print job. Higher power usage: 58 (MX822, XM7355); 50

(MX826, XM7370)

Lower power usage: 36.5 (MX822, XM7355);

35 (MX826, XM7370)

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 1.78 (MX822, XM7355); 2.94 (MX826, XM7370)

Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.2

O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but

the power switch is turned o.

0.2

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.

Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices 323

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by

lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged

after this product is not used for a speciﬁed period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 15

By using the conﬁguration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modiﬁed between 1 minute and 120 minutes.

If the print speed is less than or equal to 30 pages per minute, then you can set the timeout only up to 60

minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the

response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but

uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in

Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

•Using the Hibernate Timeout

•Using the Schedule Power modes

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modiﬁed

between one hour and one month.

Notes on EPEAT-registered imaging equipment products:

•Standby power level occurs in Hibernate or O mode.

•The product shall automatically power down to a standby power level of ≤ 1 W. The auto standby function

(Hibernate or O) shall be enabled at product shipment.

O mode

If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product

power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to estimate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are

provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends

in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's

energy usage.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain the analog facsimile card:

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number:

Notices 324

LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative

Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other

information, a product identiﬁer in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided

to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply

with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. Use a compliant telephone cord

(RJ-11) that is 26 AWG or larger when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network. See

your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to

a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an

incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ﬁve (5.0). To be certain of the number

of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone

company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identiﬁer

that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that

temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company

will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to ﬁle a complaint with the

FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could

aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in

order for you to make necessary modiﬁcations to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,

Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone

network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark

International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public

service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of

this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm

equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualiﬁed installer.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other

electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a

margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the ﬁrst page of the transmission, the date and time

it is sent and an identiﬁcation of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the

telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number

provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance

transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notices 325

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical

speciﬁcations.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to

a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only

to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed ﬁve. The REN is located on the product

label.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spéciﬁcations techniques d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique

Canada.

Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) indique le nombre maximum

d'appareils pouvant être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui

peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas

dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN est indiqué sur l'étiquette produit.

Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item

of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions

for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any

sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another

item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible

with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same

line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom

customers.

This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for

which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should diculties arise in such circumstances.

The decadic (or pulse) dialing on this device is unsuitable for use on the Telecom network in New Zealand.

For correct operation, the total of all the Ringer Equivalence Numbers (RENs) of all parallel devices connected

to the same telephone line may not exceed 5. The REN of this device is located on the label.

This device uses an RJ-11C modular connector. Contact your point of purchase if a BT adapter is required. The

Lexmark part number is 80D1873.

Notices 326

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the

equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following

limits for compliance to Telecom's speciﬁcations:

•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single

manual call initiation, and

•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt

and the beginning of the next call attempt.

•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there

is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Japanese telecom notice

The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certiﬁed

by JATE, with the following Certiﬁcation Number:

A18-0046001 or A11-0160001

Lexmark International, Inc.

LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002

A18-0046001 or A11-0160001

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone ﬁlter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which

receives metering pulses in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un ﬁltre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :

80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark

Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen

werden.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un ﬁltro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee

che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera.

Notices 327

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains regulatory information that applies only to wireless models.

If in doubt as to whether your model is a wireless model, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Modular component notice

Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number: LEX-M07-001; FCC ID: IYLLEXM07001; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-

M07001

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other

regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and

any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada

This device complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS

standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement

économique Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit

pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris les celles qui peuvent

entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directive 2014/53/EU on the

approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8

Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark

International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A

declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized

Representative or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.

Notices 328

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking:

Restrictions

This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited. This restriction applies to all

the countries listed in the table below:

AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE

EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT

LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT

RO SE SI SK TR UK (NI)

EU and other countries statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and

maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472 GHz in the EU) or 5GHz (5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725

in the EU) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both

bands.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highﬁeld House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough

Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request

from the UK Importer or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.

Compliance is indicated by the UKCA marking:

Notices 329

Restrictions or requirements in the UK

This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited.

UK statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472 GHz in the UK) or 5GHz (5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725

in the UK) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both

bands.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information

statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful

interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than

recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modiﬁcations to this equipment. Unauthorized changes

or modiﬁcations could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing

device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach

or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a

violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

Telephone: (859) 232–2000

E-mail: regulatory@lexmark.com

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada compliance

statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment

Standard ICES-003.

Notices 330

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et

Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux

équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Japanese VCCI notice

Notice to users of Class A products in Brazil

Este produto não é apropriado para uso em ambientes domésticos, pois poderá causar interferências

eletromagnéticas que obrigam o usuário a tomar medidas necessárias para minimizar estas interferências.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,

and 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863 on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the

Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within

certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic

equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8

Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark

International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A

declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized

Representative or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class A limits of EN 55032 and safety requirements of EN 62368-1.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

2016, the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, and the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous

Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012.

Notices 331

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highﬁeld House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough

Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request

from the UK Importer or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class A limits of BS EN 55032 and safety requirements of BS EN 62368-1.

Radio interference notice

Warning

This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN 55032 Class A limits and immunity

requirements of EN 55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case

the user may be required to take adequate measures.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER

PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the

country-speciﬁc warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,

from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for

repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the

product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or

option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to

that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this

statement to that user.

Notices 332

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12

months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with

the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser

Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is

available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”

message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to

deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark

designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the

Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of

the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a

repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal

obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the ﬁrmware in your printer to the

latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized

products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized

use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable

storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area

contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer

covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of

prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modiﬁcation or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark speciﬁcations

—Refurbishment, repair, reﬁlling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

Notices 333

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS

OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND

SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW

ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL

APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT

TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance

or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover

actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the

product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or

damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL

LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER

ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the

possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's

and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers

are intended beneﬁciaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or

limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not

apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Notices 334

Index

Numerics

2100‑sheet tray

installing 307

loading 32

4‑bin mailbox

installing 310

accessing the controller

board 294

activating Voice Guidance 27

adapter plug 70

adding a shortcut

copy 54

adding contacts 25

adding groups 25

adding hardware options

print driver 317

adding internal options

print driver 317

adding printers to a

computer 316

adding shortcut

e‑mail 63

fax destination 73

FTP address 78

ADF feed roller

cleaning 181

replacing 203

ADF pick roller

cleaning 179

replacing 200

ADF registration

adjusting 292

ADF separator roller

replacing 206

ADF torque limiter

replacing 209

adjusting

scanner registration 292

adjusting ADF registration 292

adjusting default volume

headphone 167

adjusting fax darkness 74

adjusting speech rate

Voice Guidance 27

adjusting the brightness

printer display 217

adjusting the brightness of the

printer display 217

adjusting toner darkness 267

AirPrint

using 46

analog fax

setting up 65

answering machine

setting up 68

applications, supported 20

assigning printer to a ring

pattern 72

attaching cables 16

automatic document feeder

(ADF)

using 52, 55, 64, 76

avoiding paper jams 218

blank pages 239

blocking junk faxes 74

bookmarks

creating 24

creating folders for 25

canceling a print job

from the computer 51

from the printer control

panel 51

cannot connect printer to

Wi‑Fi 271

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 270

cannot receive faxes using

analog fax 283

cannot scan to a network

folder 287

cannot send e‑mails 280

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 281

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 284

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 285

Card Copy

setting up 20

changing resolution

fax 73

changing the printer port settings

after installing ISP 170

changing the wallpaper 21

checking the printer

connectivity 272

checking the status of parts and

supplies 186

cleaning

exterior of the printer 171

interior of the printer 171

pick tires 175

cleaning pick roller in the

multipurpose feeder 176

cleaning the ADF feed roller 181

cleaning the ADF pick roller 179

cleaning the printer 171

Cleaning the Scanner 162

cleaning the scanner 172

cleaning the touch screen 172

clearing jam

automatic document

feeder 226

in door A 221

in door H 229

in door N 228

in mailbox bin 228

in the duplex unit 223

in the fuser 223

in the multipurpose feeder 225

in the oset stacker bin 229

in the staple ﬁnisher 232

in the staple ﬁnisher bin 229

in the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher 231

in the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher bin 231

in trays 220

clearing staple jam

in the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher 235

Cloud Connector proﬁle

creating 23

printing from 50

scanning to 79

collated printing does not

work 276

Index 335

collating copies 53

computer

connecting to the printer 169

computer, scanning to 76

conﬁdential documents do not

print 268

conﬁdential print jobs 49

printing 49

conﬁguring daylight saving

time 72

conﬁguring fax speaker

settings 167

conﬁguring supply

notiﬁcations 166

conﬁguring the e‑mail server

settings 55

conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct 169

connecting a computer to the

printer 169

connecting mobile device

to printer 169

connecting printer to distinctive

ring service 72

connecting the printer

to a wireless network 167

connecting to a wireless network

using PIN method 168

using Push Button method 168

conserving supplies 217

contacting customer

support 293

contacts

adding 25

deleting 26

editing 26

control panel

using 17

controller board

accessing 294

copy troubleshooting

partial copies of documents or

photos 288

poor copy quality 289

scanner does not respond 292

copying

on both sides of the paper 53

on letterhead 53

photos 52

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 52

using the scanner glass 52

copying dierent paper sizes 52

copying from

selected tray 52

copying multiple pages

onto a single sheet 54

creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle 23

creating a shortcut

copy 54

creating bookmarks 24

creating folders

for bookmarks 25

creating shortcut

e‑mail 63

fax destination 73

FTP address 78

creating shortcuts 21

crooked print 250

Customer Support

using 23

customer support

contacting 293

customizing the display 21

dark print 241

date and time

fax settings 72

daylight saving time

conﬁguring 72

deactivating the Wi‑Fi

network 170

default headphone volume

adjusting 167

Defective ﬂash detected 273

deleting contacts 26

deleting groups 26

Device Quotas

setting up 22

dierent paper sizes, copying 52

directory list

printing 51

Display Customization

using 21

distinctive ring service, fax

enabling 72

documents, printing

from a computer 46

from a mobile device 46

Eco‑Settings

conﬁguring 23

editing contacts 26

editing groups 26

emission notices 320, 328, 331

emptying the hole punch

box 184

enabling Magniﬁcation mode 27

enabling personal identiﬁcation

numbers 28

enabling spoken passwords 28

enabling the USB port 270

enabling Wi‑Fi Direct 169

encrypting

printer hard disk 164

enlarging copies 53

envelopes

loading 37

environmental settings 216

erasing

printer memory 163

erasing hard disk memory 163

erasing printer memory 164

etherFAX, using

setting up fax function 66

Ethernet cable 16

Ethernet port 16

exporting a conﬁguration ﬁle

using the Embedded Web

Server 318

EXT port 16

e‑mail

sending 63

e‑mail alerts

setting up 166

e‑mail function

setting up 55

e‑mail server

conﬁguring 55

e‑mail service providers 55

e‑mail shortcut

creating 63

e‑mail troubleshooting

cannot send e‑mails 280

e‑mailing

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 55

using the scanner glass 55

Index 336

factory default settings

restoring 164

fax

forwarding 74

holding 74

scheduling send time and

date 73

sending 72

fax darkness

adjusting 74

fax destination shortcut

creating 73

fax driver

installing 316

fax log

viewing 74

fax resolution

changing 73

fax server, using

setting up the fax function 67

fax setup

country‑ or region‑speciﬁc 70

standard telephone line

connection 68

fax speaker settings

conﬁguring 167

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 280

can send but not receive faxes

using analog fax 283

cannot send faxes using analog

fax 283

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 281

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 284

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 285

cannot set up etherFAX 283

missing information on the fax

cover page 285

poor print quality 284

faxing

setting the date and time 72

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 64

using the scanner glass 64

FCC notices 328

ﬁnding information about the

printer 10

ﬁnding the printer serial

number 11

ﬁrmware, updating 318

ﬂash drive

printing from 47

scanning to 78

folder paper 243

font sample list

printing 51

forwarding fax 74

FTP address

creating shortcut 78

FTP server, scanning to

using the control panel 77

fuser

replacing 193

genuine Lexmark parts and

supplies 186

gray background on prints 244

groups

adding 25

deleting 26

editing 26

hard disk memory

erasing 163

hardware options

installing 307, 310, 311, 312, 314

memory card 296

trays 306

hardware options, adding

print driver 317

held documents do not print 268

held jobs 49

printing 49

Help menu 161

Hibernate mode

conﬁguring 216

holding faxes 74

hole punch box

emptying 184

home screen

customizing 20

home screen icons

displaying 20

using 19

humidity around the printer 322

icons on the home screen

showing 20

identifying jam locations 219

imaging unit

ordering 188

replacing 191

importing a conﬁguration ﬁle

using the Embedded Web

Server 318

incorrect margins 246

indicator light

understanding the status 17

installing a memory card 296

installing internal solutions

port 302

installing optional card 298

installing options

printer hard disk 300

installing the 2100‑sheet

tray 307

installing the 4‑bin mailbox 310

installing the fax driver 316

installing the oset stacker 311

installing the print driver 316

installing the printer software 316

installing the staple ﬁnisher 312

installing the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher 314

installing trays 306

internal option is not

detected 273

internal options

ﬁrmware card 294

ﬂash memory 294

font card 294

internal solutions port 294

printer hard disk 294, 300

internal options, adding

print driver 317

internal solutions port

installing 302

jagged image

scanning from the ADF 290

jagged text

scanning from the ADF 290

jams

avoiding 218

Index 337

jams, clearing

in the standard bin 224

junk faxes

blocking 74

keyboard on the display

using 28

letterhead

copying on 53

loading 37

loading, 2100‑sheet tray 32

Lexmark Mobile Print

using 46

Lexmark ScanBack Utility

using 76

light print 247

LINE port 16

linking trays 38

2100‑sheet tray 32

letterhead in 2100‑sheet

tray 32

loading the multipurpose

feeder 37

loading trays 29

locating jam areas 219

locating the security slot 163

Magniﬁcation mode

enabling 27

maintenance kit

ordering 188

making copies 52

managing screen saver 21

memory card

installing 296

802.1x 149

About this Printer 94

Accessibility 88

Anonymous Data Collection 87

Bin Conﬁguration 106

Conﬁdential Print Setup 157

Conﬁguration Menu 89

Copy Defaults 107

Custom Scan Sizes 105

Device 160

Disk Encryption 158

Eco‑Mode 82

Erase Temporary Data Files 159

Ethernet 145

E‑mail Defaults 125

E‑mail Setup 124

Fax 161

Fax Mode 111

Fax Server Setup 121

Fax Setup 111

Finishing 96

Flash Drive Print 139

Flash Drive Scan 135

FTP Defaults 130

HTML 103

HTTP/FTP Settings 150

Image 103

IPSec 148

Job Accounting 99

Layout 95

Local Accounts 154

LPD Conﬁguration 149

Manage Permissions 153

Media Types 106

Menu Settings Page 160

Miscellaneous 159

Network 161

Network Overview 141

Notiﬁcations 84

Out of Service Erase 93

PCL 101

PDF 100

PostScript 100

Power Management 87

Preferences 81

Print 160

Quality 98

Remote Operator Panel 83

Restore Factory Defaults 89

Restrict external network

access 152

Schedule USB Devices 154

Security Audit Log 155

Setup 97

Shortcuts 161

SNMP 147

Solutions LDAP Settings 159

TCP/IP 146

ThinPrint 151

Tray Conﬁguration 104

Troubleshooting 162

Universal Setup 104

USB 151

Visible Home Screen Icons 94

Web Link Setup 130

Wireless 142

Wi‑Fi Direct 144

XPS 100

Menu Settings Page

printing 162

missing information on the fax

cover page 285

mobile device

connecting to printer 169

printing from 46, 47

Mopria Print Service 46

moving the printer 12, 215

multipurpose feeder

loading 37

navigating the screen

using gestures 27

navigating the screen using

gestures 27

noise emission levels 320

nonvolatile memory

erasing 163

Non‑Lexmark supply 275

non‑volatile memory 164

Not enough free space in ﬂash

memory for resources 274

notices 320, 321, 323, 324, 328,

331

oset stacker

installing 311

operating systems

supported 315

optional card

installing 298

ordering

maintenance kit 188

ordering supplies

imaging unit 188

staple cartridge 188

toner cartridge 186

paper

Universal size setting 29

Index 338

paper curl 276

paper jam

in the duplex area 223

in the fuser 223

paper jam in door A 221

paper jam in door C 223

paper jam in door H 229

paper jam in door N 228

paper jam in the 4‑bin

mailbox 228

paper jam in the automatic

document feeder 226

paper jam in the multipurpose

feeder 225

paper jam in the oset stacker

bin 229

paper jam in the staple ﬁnisher

bin 229

paper jam in trays 220

paper jam, clearing

automatic document

feeder 226

paper jams

avoiding 218

location 219

paper jams, clearing

in the standard bin 224

paper size

setting 29

paper type

setting 29

paper types

supported 42

parts status

checking 186

personal identiﬁcation number

method 168

personal identiﬁcation numbers

enabling 28

photos, copying 52

pick roller

replacing 197

pick roller in the multipurpose

feeder

cleaning 176

replacing 199

pick tires

cleaning 175

placing separator sheets

between copies

copying 53

poor fax print quality 284

power button light

understanding the status 17

power cord socket 16

power save modes

conﬁguring 216

prepunched paper

loading 37

print driver

hardware options, adding 317

installing 316

print job

canceling from the computer 51

canceling from the printer

control panel 51

print jobs not printed 264

print quality

cleaning the scanner 172

print quality problems 238

Print Quality Test Pages 162

print quality troubleshooting

blank or white pages 239

crooked print 250

dark print 241

ﬁne lines are not printed

correctly 242

folded or wrinkled paper 243

gray background on prints 244

horizontal light bands 256

light print 247

mottled print and dots 249

paper curl 276

print quality problems 238

repeating defects 264

skewed print 250

solid black pages 250

text or images cut o 253

toner easily rubs o 255

vertical dark bands 258

vertical dark lines 260

vertical dark lines or

streaks 261

vertical dark streaks with print

missing 262

vertical light bands 256

vertical white lines 257

print troubleshooting

collated printing does not

work 276

conﬁdential and other held

documents do not print 268

envelope seals when

printing 275

incorrect margins 246

jammed pages are not

reprinted 279

job prints from the wrong

tray 267

job prints on the wrong

paper 267

paper frequently jams 278

print jobs do not print 264

slow printing 265

tray linking does not work 278

unable to read ﬂash drive 270

printer

minimum clearances 12

selecting a location 12

shipping 216

printer conﬁgurations 13

printer display

adjusting the brightness 217

printer hard disk

encrypting 164

installing 300

printer hard disk memory 164

printer information

ﬁnding 10

printer is not responding 269

printer memory

erasing 163

printer menus 80

printer messages

Defective ﬂash detected 273

Non‑Lexmark supply 275

Not enough free space in ﬂash

memory for resources 274

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch 274

Unformatted ﬂash

detected 274

printer options troubleshooting

cannot detect internal

option 273

printer port settings

changing 170

printer ports 16

printer settings

restoring factory default 164

printer software

installing 316

printer status 17

printing

conﬁdential print jobs 49

directory list 51

Index 339

font sample list 51

from a Cloud Connector

proﬁle 50

from a computer 46

from a ﬂash drive 47

from a mobile device 46, 47

held jobs 49

Menu Settings Page 162

using Mopria Print Service 46

using Wi‑Fi Direct 47

printing a directory list 51

printing a font sample list 51

printing a network setup

page 272

printing from a computer 46

printing from a ﬂash drive 47

Push Button method 168

QR codes

adding 23

recycling

Lexmark packaging 217

Lexmark products 217

reducing copies 53

removing paper jam

in door A 221

in door H 229

in door N 228

in mailbox bin 228

in the duplex unit 223

in the fuser 223

in the multipurpose feeder 225

in the oset stacker bin 229

in the staple ﬁnisher bin 229

in the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher 231

in the staple, hole punch

ﬁnisher bin 231

in trays 220

removing staple jam 232, 235

repeat print jobs 49

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch 274

replacing

pick roller in the multipurpose

feeder 199

replacing parts

ADF pick roller 200

ADF separator roller 206

ADF torque limiter 209

fuser 193

pick roller 197

transfer roller 195

replacing supplies

imaging unit 191

staple cartridge 212, 214

toner cartridge 190

replacing the ADF feed

roller 203

replacing the ADF separator

roller 206

reports

printer status 166

printer usage 166

resetting

supply usage counters 275

resetting supply usage

counters 215

resetting the supply usage

counters 275

RJ‑11 adapter 70

running a slideshow 21

safety information 8, 9

saving paper 54

saving toner 54

Scan Center

setting up 22

scan troubleshooting

cannot scan to a computer 286

cannot scan to network

folder 287

jagged image when scanning

from the ADF 290

jagged text when scanning from

the ADF 290

partial copies of documents or

photos 288

poor copy quality 289

scan job was not

successful 290

scanner does not respond 292

scanning freezes the

computer 291

scanning takes too long 291

vertical dark streaks on output

when scanning from the

ADF 289

scanner

cleaning 172

scanner does not close 291

scanner glass

using 52, 55, 64, 76

scanning

to a Cloud Connector proﬁle 79

to a computer 76

to an FTP server 77

to ﬂash drive 78

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 76

using the scanner glass 76

scanning from ADF

jagged image 290

jagged text 290

scanning quality problem 289

scanning to a network folder 78

scanning to an FTP server

using the control panel 77

scheduling a fax 73

securing printer memory 164

security slot

locating 163

selecting a location for the

printer 12

sending e‑mail 63

sending fax 72

serial number, printer

ﬁnding 11

serial printing

setting up 171

setting the paper size 29

setting the paper type 29

setting the Universal paper

size 29

setting up

analog fax 65

setting up Device Quotas 22

setting up e‑mail alerts 166

setting up fax

country‑ or region‑speciﬁc 70

standard telephone line

connection 68

setting up fax function using

etherFAX 66

setting up serial printing 171

setting up the fax function using

fax server 67

shipping the printer 216

shortcut

Copy 21

Index 340

Email 21

Fax 21

FTP 21

shortcut, creating

e‑mail 63

fax destination 73

FTP address 78

shortcut, creating a

copy 54

shortcuts

creating 21

skewed print 250

Sleep mode

conﬁguring 216

slow printing 265

SMB

scanning 78

SMTP settings

conﬁguring 55

sorting multiple copies 53

spoken passwords

enabling 28

staple cartridge

ordering 188

replacing 212, 214

staple ﬁnisher

installing 312

staple, hole punch ﬁnisher

installing 314

statement of volatility 164

storing print jobs 49

supplies

conserving 217

supplies status

checking 186

supply notiﬁcations

conﬁguring 166

supply usage counters

resetting 215, 275

supported applications 20

supported fax 65

supported ﬁle types 48

supported ﬂash drives 48

supported operating

systems 315

supported paper sizes 39

supported paper types 42

supported paper weights 43

temperature around the

printer 322

toner cartridge

ordering 186

replacing 190

toner darkness

adjusting 267

touch screen

cleaning 172

transfer roller

replacing 195

trays

linking 38

loading 29

unlinking 38

troubleshooting

cannot connect printer to

Wi‑Fi 271

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 270

print quality problems 238

printer is not responding 269

troubleshooting, copy

partial copies of documents or

photos 288

poor copy quality 289

scanner does not close 291

scanner does not respond 292

troubleshooting, e‑mail

cannot send e‑mails 280

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 280

can send but not receive faxes

using analog fax 283

cannot send faxes using analog

fax 283

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 281

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 284

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 285

cannot set up etherFAX 283

missing information on the fax

cover page 285

poor print quality 284

troubleshooting, print

collated printing does not

work 276

conﬁdential and other held

documents do not print 268

envelope seals when

printing 275

incorrect margins 246

jammed pages are not

reprinted 279

job prints from the wrong

tray 267

job prints on the wrong

paper 267

paper frequently jams 278

print jobs do not print 264

slow printing 265

tray linking does not work 278

troubleshooting, print quality

blank or white pages 239

crooked print 250

dark print 241

ﬁne lines are not printed

correctly 242

folded or wrinkled paper 243

gray background on prints 244

horizontal light bands 256

light print 247

mottled print and dots 249

paper curl 276

repeating defects 264

skewed print 250

solid black pages 250

text or images cut o 253

toner easily rubs o 255

vertical dark bands 258

vertical dark lines 260

vertical dark lines or

streaks 261

vertical dark streaks with print

missing 262

vertical light bands 256

vertical white lines 257

troubleshooting, printer options

cannot detect internal

option 273

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan to a computer 286

cannot scan to a network

folder 287

jagged image when scanning

from the ADF 290

jagged text when scanning from

the ADF 290

partial copies of documents or

photos 288

poor copy quality 289

scan job was not

successful 290

scanner does not close 291

Index 341

scanner does not respond 292

vertical dark streaks on output

when scanning from the

ADF 289

two‑sided copying 53

unable to read ﬂash drive

troubleshooting, print 270

Unformatted ﬂash detected 274

Universal paper size

setting 29

unlinking trays 38

updating ﬁrmware 318

USB cable 16

USB port 16

enabling 270

using Customer Support 23

using Display Customization 21

using genuine Lexmark parts and

supplies 186

using QR Code Generator 23

using the ADF

copying 52

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 52, 55, 64, 76

using the control panel 17

using the home screen 19

using the scanner

glass 52, 55, 64, 76

copying 52

verify print jobs 49

vertical dark lines 260

vertical dark lines on prints 261

vertical dark streaks on output

when scanning from the

ADF 289

vertical streaks on prints 261

viewing a fax log 74

viewing reports 166

virtual keyboard

using 28

Voice Guidance

activating 27

speech rate 27

Voice Guidance speech rate

adjusting 27

volatile memory 164

erasing 163

white lines 257

white pages 239

wireless network

connecting the printer to 167

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup 168

wireless networking 167

Wi‑Fi Direct

conﬁguring 169

enabling 169

printing from a mobile

device 47

Wi‑Fi network

deactivating 170

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

wireless network 168

wrinkled paper 243

Index 342

Table of Contents

Lexmark MX822ade User Manual

Related Manuals